Sony DCR TRV60 User Manual

3-081-414-11(1)  
Dig it a l  
Vid e o Ca m e ra  
Re co rd e r  
Operating Instructions  
Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly,  
and retain it for future reference.  
Owners Record  
The model and serial numbers are located on the bottom. Record the  
serial number in the space provided below. Refer to these numbers  
whenever you call upon your Sony dealer regarding this product.  
Model No. DCR-TRV  
Model No. AC-  
Serial No.  
Serial No.  
TM  
SERIES  
DCR-TRV70  
DCR-TRV60/TRV70  
©2003 Sony Corporation  
We lco m e !  
Congratulations on your purchase of this Sony Handycam. With your Handycam, you can  
capture lifes precious moments with superior picture and sound quality. Your Handycam is  
loaded with advanced features, but at the same time it is very easy to use. You will soon be  
producing home video that you can enjoy for years to come.  
Fo r cu st o m e rs in t h e U.S.A.  
a n d CANADA  
WARNING  
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do  
not expose the unit to rain or  
moisture.  
CAUTION  
TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH  
WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,  
FULLY INSERT.  
RECYCLING LITHIUM-ION BATTERIES  
Lithium-Ion batteries are  
recyclable.  
You can help preserve our  
environment by returning  
your used rechargeable  
batteries to the collection and  
recycling location nearest you.  
For more information regarding recycling of  
rechargeable batteries, call toll free 1-800-822-  
8837, or visit http:/ / www.rbrc.org/  
This symbol is intended to  
alert the user to the presence  
of uninsulated “dangerous  
voltage” within the products  
enclosure that may be of  
sufficient magnitude to  
constitute a risk of electric  
shock to persons.  
Caution: Do not handle damaged or leaking  
Lithium-Ion batteries.  
Me m o ry St ick”  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC  
Rules. Operation is subject to the following  
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause  
harmful interference, and (2) this device must  
accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
This symbol is intended to  
alert the user to the presence  
of important operating and  
maintenance (servicing)  
instructions in the literature  
accompanying the appliance.  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with  
Canadian ICES-003.  
CAUTION  
The use of optical instruments with this  
product will increase eye hazard. As the laser  
beam used in this Handycam is harmful to  
eyes, do not attempt to disassemble the  
cabinet.  
Refer servicing to qualified personnel only.  
Notice  
If static electricity or electromagnetism causes  
data transfer to discontinue midway (fail),  
restart the application or disconnect and  
connect the USB cable again.  
2
CAUTION  
Fo r cu st o m e rs in t h e U.S.A.  
You are cautioned that any changes or  
modifications not expressly approved in this  
manual could void your authority to operate  
this equipment.  
If you have any questions about this product,  
you may call:  
Sony Customer Information Center 1-800-222-  
SONY (7669)  
The number below is for the FCC related  
matters only.  
Note:  
This equipment has been tested and found to  
comply with the limits for a Class B digital  
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
These limits are designed to provide  
Regulatory Information  
De cla ra t io n o f Co n fo rm it y  
reasonable protection against harmful  
interference in a residential installation. This  
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate  
radio frequency energy and, if not installed  
and used in accordance with the instructions,  
may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a  
particular installation. If this equipment does  
cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be determined  
by turning the equipment off and on, the user  
is encouraged to try to correct the interference  
by one or more of the following measures:  
Trade Name:  
Model No.:  
SONY  
DCR-TRV70  
Responsible Party: Sony Electronics Inc.  
Address:  
680 Kinderkamack  
Road, Oradell,  
NJ07649 U.S.A.  
201-930-6972  
Telephone No.:  
This device complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) This device  
may not cause harmful interference, and  
(2)this device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the  
equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a  
circuit different from that to which the  
receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced  
radio/ TV technician for help.  
The supplied interface cable must be used with  
the equipment in order to comply with the  
limits for a digital device pursuant to Subpart  
B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.  
3
Ma in Fe a t u re s  
• Recording moving pictures on a  
tape (p. 25)  
• Playing back a tape (p. 39)  
• Recording still images on a  
“Memory Stick” (p. 46, 109)  
Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s  
o r st ill im a g e s, a n d p la yin g  
t h e m b a ck  
• Recording moving pictures on a  
“Memory Stick” (p. 122)  
• Viewing still images recorded on  
the “Memory Stick” (p.130)  
• Viewing moving pictures recorded  
on the “Memory Stick” (p. 132)  
• Viewing moving pictures recorded on  
the tape using the USB cable (p. 156)  
• Viewing images recorded on the  
“Memory Stick” using the USB cable  
(p. 163, 168)  
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s o n t h e  
co m p u t e r  
• Capturing images on the computer  
from your camcorder using the USB  
cable (p. 158)  
• Converting an analog signal to  
digital to capture images onto the  
computer (p. 169)  
Ma in Fe a t u re s  
Acce ssin g t h e In t e rn e t via a  
USB d e vice (o p t io n a l) t h a t  
su p p o rt s yo u r ca m co rd e r  
(DCR-TRV70 o n ly)  
Accessing the Internet, sending/  
receiving your e-mail. For details,  
refer to the Network Function/  
Application Operating Instructions  
supplied with your camcorder.  
(DCR-TRV70 only) (p. 171)  
Ot h e r u se s  
Functions for adjusting exposure during recording  
• Back light (p. 34)  
NightShot/ Super NightShot/ Color Slow Shutter (p. 34)  
• PROGRAM AE (p. 59)  
• Manual exposure (p. 61)  
• Flexible Spot Meter (p. 62)  
• Recording images with the flash (p. 113)  
Functions for giving images more impact  
• Digital zoom (p. 33)  
The default setting is OFF. (To zoom greater than 10×,  
select the digital zoom power in D ZOOM in the menu settings.)  
• Fader (p. 52)  
• Picture effect (p. 55)  
• Digital effect (p. 56)  
• Title (p. 97)  
• MEMORY MIX (p. 118)  
Functions for giving a natural appearance to your recordings  
• PROGRAM AE (p. 59)  
– SPORTS  
– LANDSCAPE  
• Manual focus (p. 63)  
• Expanded focus (p. 63)  
• Spot Focus (p. 65)  
Functions for using after recording  
• End search/ Edit search/ Rec Review (p. 37)  
• Data code (p. 40)  
• Tape PB ZOOM/ Memory PB ZOOM (p. 73, 135)  
• Zero set memory (p. 74)  
• Title search (p. 75)  
• Digital program editing (p. 80, 127)  
5
Ta b le o f co n t e n t s  
Focusing manually ................................ 63  
Using the spot focus function  
Ma in Fe a t u re s ...................................... 4  
– Spot Focus .................................... 65  
Interval Recording ................................ 66  
Frame by frame recording  
– Frame recording .......................... 67  
Recording with all the pixels  
Qu ick St a rt Gu id e  
– Recording on a tape ............................. 8  
– Recording on a “Memory Stick” ...... 10  
Ge t t in g St a rt e d  
– Progressive Recording Mode .... 68  
Using the viewfinder ............................ 69  
Using this manual ................................. 12  
Checking supplied accessories ............ 14  
Step 1 Preparing the power source ..... 15  
Installing or removing the battery  
Ad va n ce d Pla yb a ck  
Op e ra t io n s  
pack ............................................ 15  
Playing back a tape with picture effect  
........................................................... 71  
Playing back a tape with digital effect  
........................................................... 72  
Enlarging images recorded on the tape  
– Tape PB ZOOM ........................... 73  
Quickly locating a scene  
– Zero set memory ......................... 74  
Searching the boundaries of the  
recorded tape by title  
Charging the battery pack ............. 16  
Connecting to a wall outlet ........... 19  
Step 2 Setting the date and time ......... 20  
Step 3 Using the touch panel ............... 23  
Re co rd in g – Ba sics  
Recording a picture ............................... 25  
Shooting backlit subjects  
– Back light function ................ 34  
Shooting in the dark  
NightShot/ Super NightShot/  
Color Slow Shutter .................. 34  
Checking recordings  
– Title search ................................... 75  
Searching a recording by date  
– Date search ................................... 76  
– End search/ Edit search/ Rec  
Review ............................................. 37  
Ed it in g  
Dubbing a tape ...................................... 78  
Dubbing only desired scenes  
– Digital program editing (on a tape)  
........................................................... 80  
Recording video or TV programs ....... 89  
Inserting a scene from a VCR  
– Insert editing ................................ 91  
Audio dubbing ...................................... 93  
Superimposing a title on a cassette with  
Cassette Memory ............................ 97  
Making your own titles ........................ 99  
Labeling a cassette with Cassette  
Pla yb a ck – Ba sics  
Playing back a tape ............................... 39  
To display the screen indicators  
– Display function ................... 40  
Viewing a recording on the TV ........... 44  
Ad va n ce d Re co rd in g  
Op e ra t io n s  
Recording still images on a “Memory  
Stick” during tape recording  
standby or tape recording ............. 46  
Self-timer recording .............................. 48  
Adjusting the white balance manually  
........................................................... 49  
Using the wide mode ........................... 50  
Using the fader function ...................... 52  
Using special effects – Picture effect .. 55  
Using special effects – Digital effect ... 56  
Using PROGRAM AE .......................... 59  
Adjusting the exposure manually ...... 61  
Using the spot light-metering function  
– Flexible Spot Meter ..................... 62  
Memory ......................................... 100  
Erasing all the data in Cassette Memory  
......................................................... 101  
Me m o ry St ick” Op e ra t io n s  
Using a “Memory Stick”  
– Introduction ............................... 102  
Selecting the quality and size of image  
data ................................................. 105  
Recording still images on a “Memory  
Stick”  
– Memory Photo recording ......... 109  
6
Ta b le o f co n t e n t s  
Recording an image from a tape as a still  
image .............................................. 116  
Superimposing a still image in the  
“Memory Stick” on an image  
– MEMORY MIX .......................... 118  
Interval Photo Recording ................... 121  
Recording moving pictures on a  
“Memory Stick”  
Connecting your camcorder to a  
computer using the USB cable  
(For Macintosh users) .................. 166  
Viewing images recorded on “Memory  
Stick” on a computer  
(For Macintosh users) .................. 168  
Capturing images from an analog video  
unit on a computer  
– MPEG MOVIE recording ......... 122  
Self-timer recording ............................ 124  
Recording a picture from a tape as a  
moving picture ............................. 125  
Recording edited pictures from a tape as  
a moving picture  
– Signal convert function ............. 169  
Usin g t h e Ne t w o rk fu n ct io n  
(DCR-TRV70 o n ly)  
Accessing the network ....................... 171  
For details, refer to the Network  
Function/ Application Operating  
Instructions supplied with your  
camcorder.  
– Digital program editing  
(on a “Memory Stick”) ................. 127  
Changing the recording folder .......... 129  
Viewing a still image  
– Memory Photo playback .......... 130  
Viewing a moving picture  
– MPEG MOVIE playback .......... 132  
Choosing the playback folder ........... 134  
Enlarging still images recorded on a  
“Memory Stick”  
– Memory PB ZOOM ................... 135  
Playing back images continuously  
– Slide show .................................. 136  
Preventing accidental erasure  
– Image protection ........................ 137  
Deleting images  
Cu st o m izin g Yo u r Ca m co rd e r  
Changing the menu settings .............. 172  
Tro u b le sh o o t in g  
Types of trouble and how to correct  
trouble ............................................ 183  
Self-diagnosis display ......................... 191  
Warning indicators ............................. 192  
Warning messages .............................. 193  
Ad d it io n a l In fo rm a t io n  
Usable cassettes ................................... 194  
About the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack  
......................................................... 197  
About i.LINK ....................................... 199  
Using your camcorder abroad .......... 201  
Maintenance information and  
– DELETE ...................................... 138  
Changing the image size  
– Resize .......................................... 141  
Writing a print mark  
– Print mark ................................... 142  
precautions .................................... 202  
Specifications ....................................... 208  
Vie w in g im a g e s w it h yo u r  
co m p u t e r  
Viewing images with a computer  
– Introduction ............................... 143  
Connecting your camcorder to a  
computer using the USB cable  
(For Windows users) .................... 146  
Viewing pictures recorded on the tape  
on a computer  
Qu ick Re fe re n ce  
Identifying parts and controls ........... 210  
Index ..................................................... 218  
– USB Streaming  
(For Windows users) .................... 156  
Viewing images recorded on the  
“Memory Stick” on a computer  
(For Windows users) .................... 163  
7
Qu ick St a rt Gu id e – Re co rd in g o n a t a p e  
Co n n e ct in g t h e p o w e r co rd  
Use the battery pack when using your camcorder outdoors (p. 15).  
2
3
Open the DC IN  
jack cover.  
AC Adaptor  
(supplied)  
1
Connect the plug with its v  
mark facing up.  
In se rt in g a ca sse t t e  
3 Close the cassette  
1 Slide OPEN/ Z EJECT  
in the direction of  
the arrow to open the  
lid.  
2 Push the center of the  
cassette back to insert  
the cassette. Insert the  
cassette into the  
compartment by  
pressing  
on the  
cassette  
compartment.  
cassette compartment  
with the window  
facing up.  
After the cassette  
compartment goes  
down completely,  
close the lid until it  
clicks.  
To e je ct t h e ca sse t t e  
Follow the procedure above, and take out the cassette after the cassette compartment  
opens completely in Step 2.  
Note  
Do not press the cassette compartment down forcibly. Doing so may cause a  
malfunction.  
How to hold  
your camcorder  
Fastening the grip belt  
Fasten the grip belt firmly.  
8
Re co rd in g a p ict u re o n a t a p e (p . 25)  
2Set the POWER switch  
1Remove the lens cap.  
to CAMERA while  
pressing the small  
green button.  
3Press OPEN  
to open the  
LCD panel.  
The picture  
appears on  
the screen.  
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
4Press START/ STOP. Your  
camcorder starts recording. To  
stop recording, press START/  
STOP again.  
View finder  
When the LCD panel is closed,  
use the viewfinder with your eye  
against the eyecup.  
Adjust the viewfinder lens to  
your eyesight (p. 31).  
When you purchase your camcorder, the date and time are not set for the clock. If you want to  
record the date and time for a picture, set the clock setting before recording (p. 20).  
Mo n it o rin g t h e p la yb a ck p ict u re o n t h e LCD  
scre e n (p . 39)  
2Press  
on the touch panel to  
rewind the tape.  
1Set the POWER  
switch to VCR  
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
while pressing the  
small green button.  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
3Press on the touch panel to  
start playback.  
Note  
When using the touch panel, press  
operation buttons lightly with your  
finger or the supplied stylus (DCR-  
TRV70 only) supporting the LCD panel  
from the back side of it. Do not press  
the LCD screen with sharp-pointed  
objects other than the supplied stylus  
(DCR-TRV70 only).  
Do not pick up your camcorder  
by holding parts as illustrated.  
9
View finder  
LCD panel Battery pack  
Flash  
Qu ick St a rt Gu id e – Re co rd in g o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Co n n e ct in g t h e p o w e r co rd  
Use the battery pack when using your camcorder outdoors (p. 15).  
2
3
Open the DC IN  
AC Adaptor  
jack cover.  
1
(supplied)  
Connect the plug with its v  
mark facing up.  
In se rt in g a “ Me m o ry St ick” (p . 104)  
Insert a “Memory Stick” in the “Memory Stick” slot as far as it can go with the b mark  
facing out as illustrated.  
Access lamp  
b mark  
Press the “Memory Stick”  
once lightly to eject it.  
While the access lamp is lit or flashing  
Do not shake or knock your camcorder because your camcorder is reading the data  
from the “Memory Stick” or recording the data on the “Memory Stick.” Do not turn the  
power off, eject the “Memory Stick” or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, image data  
may become damaged.  
How to hold  
your camcorder  
Fastening the grip belt  
Fasten the grip belt firmly.  
10  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” (p . 109)  
1Remove the lens cap (p. 25).  
2Set the POWER switch  
to MEMORY while  
pressing the small green  
button.  
3Press OPEN to  
open the LCD  
panel.  
Make sure that the  
LOCK switch is set to  
the left (unlock)  
The picture  
appears on the  
screen.  
position.  
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
View finder  
When the LCD panel is  
closed, use the viewfinder  
with your eye against the  
eyecup.  
Adjust the viewfinder  
lens to your eyesight  
(p. 31).  
4Keep pressing PHOTO lightly. 5Press PHOTO deeply.  
The image while pressing  
the button deeply is  
recorded on the “Memory  
Stick.”  
When the green z mark stops  
flashing, then lights up, you  
can record a still image.  
FINE  
FINE  
1600  
1600  
12  
PHOTO  
PHOTO  
When you purchase your camcorder, the date and time are not set for the clock. If you want to  
record the date and time for a picture, set the clock setting before recording (p. 20).  
Mo n it o rin g t h e p la yb a ck st ill im a g e o n t h e LCD  
scre e n (p . 130)  
1Set the POWER switch to MEMORY while  
pressing the small green button.  
Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left  
(unlock) position.  
2Press PLAY. The last  
PLAY  
recorded image is displayed.  
Do not pick up your camcorder  
by holding parts as illustrated.  
11  
View finder  
LCD panel Battery pack  
Flash  
— Ge t t in g St a rt e d —  
Usin g t h is m a n u a l  
The instructions in this manual are for the two models listed in the table below. Before  
you start reading this manual and operating your camcorder, check the model number  
by looking at the bottom of your camcorder. The DCR-TRV70 is the model used for  
illustration purposes. Otherwise, the model name is indicated in the illustrations. Any  
differences in operation are clearly indicated in the text, for example, “DCR-TRV70  
only.”  
As you read through this manual, buttons and settings on your camcorder are shown in  
capital letters.  
After “Advanced Recording Operations” section of this manual, position of the POWER  
switch is shown by the icons below.  
: Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
VCR  
: Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
: Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK  
(DCR-TRV70 only).  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
DCR-TRV70 only  
The MEMORY/ NETWORK position of the POWER switch is shown as MEMORY or  
in this manual.  
When you carry out an operation, you can hear a beep to indicate that the operation is  
being carried out.  
Types of differences  
DCR-  
TRV60  
MEMORY  
TRV70  
Mark on the POWER switch  
Network function  
MEMORY/ NETWORK  
z
z
Provided  
Not provided  
No t e o n Ca sse t t e Me m o ry  
Your camcorder is based on the DV format. You can use only mini DV cassettes on your  
camcorder. We recommend that you use a cassette with Cassette Memory  
.
Cassettes with Cassette Memory have the  
(Cassette Memory) mark.  
No t e o n TV co lo r syst e m s  
TV color systems differ depending on the country or area. To view your recordings on a  
TV, you need an NTSC system-based TV.  
Co p yrig h t p re ca u t io n s  
Television programs, films, video tapes, and other materials may be copyrighted.  
Unauthorized recording of such materials may be contrary to the copyright laws.  
12  
Usin g t h is m a n u a l  
Pre ca u t io n s o n co n n e ct in g w it h o t h e r e q u ip m e n t  
When connecting your camcorder to another equipment such as the VCR or the  
computer with the USB cable or i.LINK cable, be sure to confirm the insert direction of  
the connector plug before connecting your camcorder to another equipment. If you  
insert the connector plug forcibly in the wrong direction, the terminal area may break.  
This may cause a malfunction of your camcorder.  
Pre ca u t io n s o n ca m co rd e r ca re  
Le n s a n d LCD scre e n /fin d e r (o n m o u n t e d m o d e ls o n ly)  
The LCD screen and the finder are manufactured using extremely high-precision  
technology, so over 99.99% of the pixels are operational for effective use.  
How ever, there may be some tiny black points and/or bright points (w hite, red,  
blue or green in color) that constantly appear on the LCD screen and the finder.  
These points are normal in the manufacturing process and do not affect the  
recording in any w ay.  
• Do not let your camcorder get wet. Keep your camcorder away from rain and sea  
water. Letting your camcorder get wet may cause your camcorder to malfunction.  
Sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired [a ].  
Never leave your camcorder exposed to temperatures above 60°C (140°F), such as in a  
car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight [b ].  
• Be careful when placing the camera near a window or outdoors. Exposing the LCD  
screen, the finder or the lens to direct sunlight for long periods may cause  
malfunctions [c].  
• Do not directly shoot the sun. Doing so might cause your camcorder to malfunction.  
Take pictures of the sun in low light conditions such as dusk [d ].  
[a ]  
[b ]  
[c]  
[d ]  
13  
Ch e ckin g su p p lie d a cce sso rie s  
Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your camcorder.  
1
2
3
4
9
qf  
5
6
qa  
7
8
q;  
qs  
qd  
1 AC-L15A/L15B AC Adaptor (1), pow er  
7 Lens cap (1) (p. 25)  
cord (1) (p. 16)  
8 Lens hood (1) (p. 32)  
2 NP-FM50 rechargeable battery pack  
9 “Memory Stick” (1) (p. 102)  
(1) (p. 15, 16)  
0 USB cable (1) (p. 143)  
3 A/V connecting cable (1) (p. 44)  
qa CD-ROM (SPVD-010 USB Driver) (1)  
4 Wireless Remote Commander (1)  
(p. 148)  
(p. 215)  
qs Cleaning cloth (1) (p. 203)  
qd Stylus (1) (DCR-TRV70 only) (p. 171)  
qf Shoe cover (1) (p. 94)  
5 Size AA (R6) battery for Remote  
Commander (2) (p. 216)  
6 Shoulder strap (1)  
Contents of the recording cannot be compensated if recording or playback is not made due to a  
malfunction of the camcorder, storage media, etc.  
14  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r so u rce  
In st a llin g o r re m o vin g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
Be sure to set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) before installing, removing or  
exchanging the battery pack.  
(1) Lift up the viewfinder.  
(2) Slide the battery pack down until it clicks.  
1
2
To re m o ve t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
(1) Lift up the viewfinder.  
(2) Slide the battery pack out in the direction of the arrow while pressing BATT  
down.  
1
2
BATT release  
button  
2
If you use the large capacity battery pack  
If you install the NP-FM70/ QM71/ QM71D/ FM91/ QM91/ QM91D battery pack on your  
camcorder, extend and lift up the viewfinder and adjust the angle of it.  
15  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r so u rce  
Ch a rg in g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
Use the battery pack after charging it for your camcorder.  
Your camcorder operates only with the InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (M series).  
See page 197 for details on “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack.  
(1) Install the battery pack on your camcorder.  
(2) Connect the AC Adaptor supplied with your camcorder to the DC IN jack with  
the DC plugs v mark facing up.  
(3) Connect the power cord to the AC Adaptor.  
(4) Connect the power cord to a wall outlet.  
(5) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG). Charging begins. The CHARGE lamp  
lights up. When charging is completed, the CHARGE lamp turns off (full  
charge).  
5
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
CHARGE lamp  
3
2
Aft e r ch a rg in g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
Disconnect the AC Adaptor from the DC IN jack on your camcorder.  
Note  
Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the DC plug of  
the AC Adaptor. This may cause a short-circuit, damaging the AC Adaptor.  
When you use the AC Adaptor  
Place the AC Adaptor near a wall outlet. While using the AC Adaptor, if any trouble  
occurs with this unit, disconnect the plug from a wall outlet as soon as possible to cut  
off the power.  
16  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r so u rce  
Note on the CHARGE lamp  
The CHARGE lamp flashes in the following cases:  
– The battery pack is not properly installed.  
– Something is wrong with the battery pack.  
Ch a rg in g t im e  
Battery pack  
Full charge  
150  
NP-FM50 (supplied)  
NP-FM70  
240  
NP-QM71/ QM71D  
NP-FM91/ QM91/ QM91D  
260  
360  
Approximate minutes at 25°C (77°F) to charge an empty battery pack  
The charging time may increase if the batterys temperature is extremely high or low  
because of the ambient temperature.  
Re co rd in g t im e  
Recording w ith  
the view finder  
Recording w ith  
the LCD screen  
Battery pack  
Continuous  
Typical*  
70  
Continuous  
Typical*  
60  
NP-FM50 (supplied)  
NP-FM70  
125  
265  
305  
465  
105  
220  
255  
390  
155  
130  
NP-QM71/ QM71D  
NP-FM91/ QM91/ QM91D  
180  
150  
270  
230  
Approximate minutes when you use a fully charged battery pack  
* Approximate number of minutes when recording while you repeat recording start/  
stop, zooming and turning the power on/ off. The actual battery life may be shorter.  
Pla yin g t im e  
Playing time  
w ith the LCD panel closed  
Playing time  
on the LCD screen  
Battery pack  
NP-FM50 (supplied)  
NP-FM70  
220  
450  
530  
785  
160  
335  
390  
585  
NP-QM71/ QM71D  
NP-FM91/ QM91/ QM91D  
Approximate minutes when you use a fully charged battery pack  
Note  
Approximate recording time and continuous playing time at 25°C (77°F). The battery  
life will be shorter if you use your camcorder in a cold environment.  
17  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r so u rce  
Ch e ckin g t h e st a t u s o f t h e b a t t e ry p a ck – Ba t t e ry In fo  
(1) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).  
(2) Press OPEN to open the LCD panel.  
(3) Press DISPLAY/ BATT INFO.  
The battery charge level (the percentage of the current remaining battery time  
to the recording time when fully charged) and remaining battery time when  
using the LCD screen or viewfinder are displayed for about seven seconds.  
If you keep pressing DISPLAY/ BATT INFO, the indicator is displayed for  
about 20 seconds.  
3
BATTERY INFO  
BATTERY INFO  
BATTERY CHARGE LEVEL  
BATTERY CHARGE LEVEL  
0%  
50%  
100%  
0%  
50%  
100%  
DISPLAY/  
BATT INFO  
REC TIME AVAILABLE  
LCD SCREEN : 80 min  
VIEWFINDER : 100 min  
REC TIME AVAILABLE  
LCD SCREEN : 105 min  
VIEWFINDER : 125 min  
During charging  
Fully charged  
Note  
The BATT INFO indicator may not be displayed in the following cases:  
– The battery pack is not properly installed.  
– Something is wrong with the battery pack.  
– The battery is discharged completely.  
Battery Info  
The number displayed as Battery Info is the approximate recording time.  
While the remaining battery time is being calculated  
“CALCULATING BATTERY INFO...” is displayed.  
18  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r so u rce  
Co n n e ct in g t o a w a ll o u t le t  
Connect your camcorder to a wall outlet the way described in “Charging the battery  
pack” on page 16. You can go on using your camcorder without fear of the battery  
running out.  
PRECAUTION  
The set is not disconnected from the AC power source (house current) as long as it is  
connected to the wall outlet, even if the set itself has been turned off.  
Notes  
• The AC Adaptor can supply power from a wall outlet even if the battery pack is  
attached to your camcorder.  
• The DC IN jack has “source priority.” This means that the battery pack cannot supply  
any power if the power cord is connected to the DC IN jack, even when the power  
cord is not plugged into a wall outlet.  
19  
St e p 2 Se t t in g t h e d a t e a n d t im e  
Set the date and time when you use your camcorder for the first time. The “CLOCK  
SET” indicator will appear each time you set the POWER switch to CAMERA or  
MEMORY unless you set the date and time settings.  
If you do not set the date and time, “--- -- ----” and “--:--:--” are recorded on the tape or  
the “Memory Stick” as the data code.  
If you do not use your camcorder for about three months, the date and time settings  
may be cleared from memory (bars may appear) because the built-in rechargeable  
battery installed in your camcorder will have been discharged (p. 204). In this case,  
charge the built-in rechargeable battery, then set your area, the daylight saving time  
(DST*), the year, the month, the day, the hour and the minute.  
* Instead of DST, SUMMERTIME is displayed on the screen for some models.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY.  
(2) Press OPEN to open the LCD panel.  
(3) Press FN (Function) to display PAGE1 (p. 23).  
(4) Press MENU.  
(5) Press r/ R to select  
, then press EXEC.  
(6) Press r/ R to select CLOCK SET, then press EXEC.  
(7) Press r/ R to select your area, then press EXEC.  
(8) Press r/ R to select whether your area is in the daylight saving time or not,  
then press EXEC.  
(9) Press r/ R to select a desired year, then press EXEC.  
(10) Set the month, day and hour with the same procedure as Step 8.  
(11) Press r/ R to set the minute, then press EXEC by the time signal. The clock  
starts to move.  
5
7
9
6
8
EXIT  
EXIT  
GMT +0.0  
SETUP MENU  
CLOCK SET  
AREA  
R
CLOCK SET –:––:––  
USB STREAM  
1
Lisbon, London  
r
LANGUAGE  
DEMO MODE  
DST OFF  
DATE  
Y
M
D
– – – – – – – – – – – : – –  
r
R
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
EXIT  
GMT –5.0  
CLOCK SET  
AREA26  
EXIT  
GMT –5.0  
CLOCK SET  
AREA26  
New York, Bogota  
New York, Bogota  
DST OFF  
ON  
DST OFF  
R
R
R
r
R
R
DATE  
Y
M
D
DATE  
Y
M
D
1
– – – – – – – – – – – : – –  
2003 JAN  
12 : 00 AM  
r
r
r
r
r
R
r
R
EXEC  
EXEC  
3
FN  
11  
EXIT  
GMT –5.0  
EXIT  
CLOCK SET JUL 4 2003  
CLOCK SET  
AREA26  
SETUP MENU  
New York, Bogota  
USB STREAM  
LANGUAGE  
DEMO MODE  
5:30:00 PM  
DST OFF  
R
R
R
r
R
R
DATE  
Y
M
D
1
2003 JAN  
12 : 00 AM  
r
r
r
r
r
R
r
R
EXEC  
EXEC  
RET.  
20  
St e p 2 Se t t in g t h e d a t e a n d t im e  
To re t u rn t o FN (Fu n ct io n )  
Press EXIT.  
When using your camcorder abroad  
Set the clock to the local time (p. 22).  
If you use your camcorder in an area w here daylight saving time is used  
Set DST SET in  
to ON in the menu settings.  
Note on the time indicator  
The internal clock of your camcorder operates on a 12-hour cycle.  
• 12:00 AM stands for midnight.  
• 12:00 PM stands for noon.  
21  
St e p 2 Se t t in g t h e d a t e a n d t im e  
Sim p le se t t in g o f clo ck b y t im e d iffe re n ce  
You can easily set the clock to the local time by setting a time difference. Select AREA  
SET and DST SET* in  
in the menu settings.  
See page 181 for details.  
* Instead of DST, SUMMERTIME is displayed on the screen for some models.  
Wo rld t im e d iffe re n ce  
1920 21 22 23 2425 26 272930 31 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 121314 16 17 18  
Area  
code  
Time-zone  
differences  
Area  
code  
Time-zone  
differences  
Area setting  
Area setting  
GMT  
Lisbon, London  
Berlin, Paris  
+11:00  
+12:00  
–12:00  
–11:00  
–10:00  
–09:00  
–08:00  
–07:00  
–06:00  
–05:00  
–04:00  
–03:30  
–03:00  
–02:00  
–01:00  
Solomon Is.  
1
2
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
+01:00  
+02:00  
+03:00  
+03:30  
+04:00  
+04:30  
+05:00  
+05:30  
+06:00  
+06:30  
+07:00  
+08:00  
+09:00  
+09:30  
+10:00  
Fiji, Wellington  
Eniwetok, Kwajalein  
Midway Is., Samoa  
Hawaii  
Helsinki, Cairo  
Moscow, Nairobi  
Tehran  
3
4
5
Abu Dhabi, Baku  
Kabul  
Alaska  
6
LosAngeles, Tijuana  
Denver, Arizona  
Chicago, MexicoCity  
New York, Bogota  
Santiago  
7
Karachi, Islamabad  
Calcutta, New Delhi  
Almaty, Dhaka  
Rangoon  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Bangkok, Jakarta  
HongKong, Singapore  
Seoul, Tokyo  
St. John’s  
Brasilia, Montevideo  
Fernando de Noronha  
Azores  
Adelaide, Darwin  
Melbourne, Sydney  
22  
St e p 3 Usin g t h e t o u ch p a n e l  
Your camcorder has operation buttons on the LCD screen.  
Touch the LCD screen directly with your finger or the supplied stylus (DCR-TRV70  
only) to operate each function.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA to record, VCR to play back or MEMORY  
to use a “Memory Stick.”  
(2) Press OPEN to open the LCD panel.  
(3) Press FN. Operation buttons on PAGE1 are displayed on the LCD screen.  
(4) Press PAGE2/ PAGE3 to display PAGE2/ PAGE3. Operation buttons on  
PAGE2/ PAGE3 are displayed on the LCD screen.  
(5) Press a desired operation item. See relevant pages of this manual for each  
function.  
When the POWER switch  
is set to CAMERA  
3
PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3 EXIT  
SPOT  
FOCUS  
SPOT  
METER  
MENU FADER END  
SCH  
EXPO-  
SURE  
1
DISPLAY/BATT  
INFO  
2
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To e xe cu t e se t t in g s  
Press  
OK. The display returns to PAGE1/ PAGE2/ PAGE3.  
To ca n ce l se t t in g s  
Press  
OFF. The display returns to PAGE1/ PAGE2/ PAGE3.  
To m a ke scre e n in d ica t o rs d isa p p e a r  
Press DISPLAY/ BATT INFO.  
23  
St e p 3 Usin g t h e t o u ch p a n e l  
Op e ra t io n b u t t o n s o n e a ch d isp la y  
When the POWER sw itch is set to CAMERA  
PAGE1 SPOT FOCUS, MENU, FADER, END SCH, SPOT METER, EXPOSURE  
PAGE2 SELFTIMER, DIG EFFT, LCD BRT, VOL, MEM MIX  
PAGE3 SUPER NS, COLOR SLW S, PRGRE REC  
When the POWER sw itch is set to VCR  
PAGE1 MENU, LCD BRT, VOL, END SCH  
PAGE2 PB ZOOM, DIG EFFT, DATA CODE  
PAGE3 V SPD PLAY, A DUB CTRL, REC CTRL  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY  
During memory camera  
PAGE1 SPOT FOCUS, MENU, PLAY, PB FOLDR, SPOT METER, EXPOSURE  
PAGE2 SELFTIMER, PLAY, MEM MIX  
PAGE3 LCD BRT, PLAY, VOL  
During memory playback  
PAGE1 MENU, CAM, PB FOLDR, DEL  
PAGE2 PB ZOOM, CAM, RESIZE, DATA CODE  
PAGE3 LCD BRT, CAM, VOL  
Notes  
• When using the touch panel, press operation buttons lightly with your finger or the  
supplied stylus (DCR-TRV70 only) supporting the LCD panel from the back side of it.  
• Do not press the LCD screen with sharp-pointed objects other than the supplied  
stylus. (DCR-TRV70 only)  
• Do not press the LCD screen too hard.  
• Do not touch the LCD screen with wet hands.  
• If FN is not on the LCD screen, touch the LCD screen lightly to make it appear. You  
can control the display with DISPLAY/ BATT INFO on your camcorder.  
While executing each item  
The green bar appears above the item.  
If the items are not available  
The color of the items changes to gray.  
Touch panel  
You can operate with the touch panel using the viewfinder (p. 69).  
24  
— Re co rd in g – Ba sics —  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Follow the procedures in “Step 1” and “Step 2” (p. 15 to 22) beforehand.  
(1) Remove the lens cap and pull the lens cap string to fix it.  
(2) Prepare the power source (p. 15 to 19) and insert a cassette (p. 8).  
(3) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA while pressing the small green button.  
This sets your camcorder to standby.  
(4) Press OPEN to open the LCD panel. The picture appears on the screen.  
(5) Press START/ STOP. Your camcorder starts recording. The REC indicator  
appears. The camera recording lamp located on the front of your camcorder  
lights up. To stop recording, press START/ STOP again.  
3
1
LOCK sw itch  
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
4
2
Camera recording  
lamp  
5
REC 0:00:01  
50min  
Microphone  
Se lf-t im e r re co rd in g  
If you record with the self-timer, your camcorder automatically starts recording on a  
tape after counting down for about 10 seconds. See page 48 for details.  
25  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Note on recording  
Your camcorder records and plays back in the SP (standard play) mode and in the LP  
(long play) mode. Select SP or LP in in the menu settings (p. 179). In the LP mode,  
you can record 1.5 times as long as in the SP mode.  
When you record a tape in the LP mode on your camcorder, we recommend playing  
back the tape on your camcorder.  
To enable smooth transition  
Transition between the last scene you recorded and the next scene is smooth as long as  
you do not eject the cassette even if you turn off your camcorder.  
However, check the following:  
– Do not mix recordings in the SP mode and in the LP mode on one tape.  
– When you change the battery pack, set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).  
Notes  
• The recording data (date/ time or various settings when recorded) is not displayed  
during recording. However, it is recorded automatically on the tape. To display the  
recording data, press DATA CODE during playback. You can also use the Remote  
Commander for this operation (p. 40).  
• Be careful not to touch the microphone.  
If you leave your camcorder in standby for five minutes w hile the cassette is  
inserted  
Your camcorder automatically turns off. This is to save battery power and to prevent  
the battery pack and tape from wearing. To return to standby, set the POWER switch to  
OFF (CHG) and then back to CAMERA. However, your camcorder does not turn off  
automatically while the cassette is not inserted.  
When you record in the SP mode and in the LP mode on one tape or you record in  
the LP mode  
• The transition between scenes may not be smooth.  
• The playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be written properly  
between scenes.  
Note on the LOCK sw itch  
When you set the LOCK switch to the right, the POWER switch can no longer be set to  
MEMORY accidentally. The LOCK switch is set to the left as the default setting.  
26  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
In d ica t o rs d isp la ye d d u rin g re co rd in g  
Indicators are not recorded on the tape.  
Remaining battery time  
Cassette Memory  
This appears when using a cassette with Cassette Memory.  
Recording mode  
STBY/REC  
REC 0:00:01  
45min  
50min  
Time code/Tape counter  
Remaining tape  
This appears after you insert a cassette.  
JUL  
4
2003  
12:05:56PM  
FN  
FN button  
Press this button to display operation buttons on the  
LCD screen.  
Time  
The time is displayed about five seconds after the  
power is turned on.  
Date  
The date is displayed about five seconds after the  
power is turned on.  
Remaining battery time indicator during recording  
The remaining battery time indicator roughly indicates the continuous recording time.  
The indicator may not be correct, depending on the conditions in which you are  
recording. When you close the LCD panel and open it again, it takes about one minute  
for the correct remaining battery time in minutes to be displayed.  
Time code  
The time code indicates the recording or playback time, “0:00:00” (hours : minutes :  
seconds) in CAMERA and “0:00:00:00” (hours : minutes : seconds : frames) in VCR.  
You cannot rewrite only the time code.  
Recording data  
The recording data (date/ time or various settings when recorded) is not displayed  
during recording. However, it is recorded automatically on the tape. To display the  
recording data, press DATA CODE during playback. You can also use the Remote  
Commander for this operation (p. 40).  
27  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Aft e r re co rd in g  
(1) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).  
(2) Close the LCD panel.  
(3) Eject the cassette.  
(4) Remove the power source.  
Ad ju st in g t h e LCD scre e n  
180°  
90°  
When you adjust the angle of the LCD panel, make sure if the LCD panel is opened up  
to 90 degrees.  
Notes  
• When using the LCD screen except in the mirror mode, the viewfinder automatically  
turns off.  
• When you turn the LCD panel over and move it back to your camcorder body with  
the LCD screen facing out during recording or recording standby, the brightness of  
the LCD screen is fix to BRT NORMAL.  
When monitoring on the LCD screen  
You can turn the LCD panel over and move it back to your camcorder body with the  
LCD screen facing out.  
28  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Sh o o t in g w it h t h e m irro r m o d e  
This feature allows the camera subject to view him-or herself on the LCD screen.  
The subject uses this feature to check his or her own image on the LCD screen while you  
look at the subject in the viewfinder.  
Picture in the mirror mode  
The picture on the LCD screen is a mirror-image. However, the picture will be normal  
when recorded.  
29  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Ad ju st in g t h e b rig h t n e ss o f t h e LCD scre e n  
(1) When the POWER switch is set to CAMERA, press FN and select PAGE2.  
When the POWER switch is set to VCR, press FN to display PAGE1.  
When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY, press FN and select PAGE3.  
(2) Press LCD BRT. The screen to adjust the brightness of the LCD screen appears.  
(3) Adjust the brightness of the LCD screen using – (to dim)/ + (to brighten).  
(4) Press  
OK to return to PAGE1/ PAGE2/ PAGE3 in Step 1.  
2,3  
LCD  
BRT  
OK  
LCD BRT  
+
The bar indicator  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
LCD screen backlight  
You can change the brightness of the backlight. Select LCD B.L. in  
settings when using the battery pack (p. 175).  
in the menu  
Even if you adjust LCD BRT or LCD B.L.  
The recorded picture will not be affected.  
30  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Ad ju st in g t h e vie w fin d e r  
If you record pictures with the LCD panel closed, check the picture with the viewfinder.  
Adjust the viewfinder lens to your eyesight so that the images in the viewfinder come  
into sharp focus.  
Lift up the viewfinder and move the viewfinder lens adjustment lever.  
The view finder lens  
adjustment lever  
View finder backlight  
You can change the brightness of the backlight. Select VF B.L. in  
settings when using the battery pack (p. 175).  
in the menu  
Even if you adjust VF B.L.  
The recorded picture will not be affected.  
Using the view finder during recording is recommended in the follow ing cases:  
– When checking images on the LCD screen is difficult.  
– When you fear the battery running out.  
31  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
At t a ch in g t h e su p p lie d le n s h o o d  
To record fine pictures under strong light, we recommend attaching the lens hood. Also  
the lens cap can be attached even with the lens hood on.  
Note  
You cannot attach filters or other objects onto the lens hood.  
If you forcibly attach these objects onto the lens hood, you will no longer be able to  
remove filters or other objects from the hood.  
When you use the filter (optional)  
The shadow of the lens hood may appear in the corners of the screen.  
32  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Usin g t h e zo o m fe a t u re  
Move the power zoom lever a little for a slower zoom. Move it further for a faster zoom.  
Using the zoom sparingly results in better-looking recordings.  
W : Wide-angle (The subject appears farther away.)  
T : Telephoto (The subject appears closer.)  
W
W
T
T
To use zoom greater than 10×  
Zoom greater than 10× is performed digitally. Digital zoom can be set to 20× or 120×.  
To activate digital zoom, select the digital zoom power in D ZOOM in  
settings (p. 174). The digital zoom is set to OFF as a default setting.  
The picture quality deteriorates because the picture is processed digitally.  
in the menu  
W
T
The right side of the bar shows the digital zooming  
zone.  
The digital zooming zone appears when you select  
the digital zoom power in the menu settings.  
When you shoot close to a subject  
If you cannot get a sharp focus, move the power zoom lever to the “W” side until the  
focus is sharp. You can shoot a subject that is at least about 80 cm (about 2 5/ 8 feet)  
away from the lens surface in the telephoto position, or about 1 cm (about 1/ 2 inch)  
away in the wide-angle position.  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY  
You cannot use the digital zoom.  
33  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Sh o o t in g b a cklit su b je ct s – Ba ck lig h t fu n ct io n  
When you shoot a subject with the light source behind the subject or a subject with a  
light background, use the back light function.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY.  
(2) Press BACK LIGHT.  
The . indicator appears on the screen.  
BACK LIGHT  
To ca n ce l t h e b a ck lig h t fu n ct io n  
Press BACK LIGHT again.  
When shooting backlit subjects  
If you set EXPOSURE to MANUAL (p. 61) or select SPOT METER (p. 62), the back light  
function will be canceled.  
Sh o o t in g in t h e d a rk  
– Nig h t Sh o t /Su p e r Nig h t Sh o t /Co lo r Slo w Sh u t t e r  
Usin g Nig h t Sh o t  
NightShot enables you to shoot a subject in the night or in a dark place.  
When using NightShot, the picture may be recorded in incorrect or unnatural colors.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY.  
(2) Slide NIGHTSHOT to ON.  
The  
and ”NIGHTSHOT” indicators flash on the screen.  
Infrared rays (NightShot Light) emitter  
NIGHTSHOT  
ON OFF  
To cancel NightShot  
Slide NIGHTSHOT to OFF.  
34  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Usin g Su p e r Nig h t Sh o t  
Super NightShot makes subjects more than 16 times brighter than those recorded using  
NightShot.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.  
(2) Slide NIGHTSHOT to ON.  
The  
and ”NIGHTSHOT” indicators flash on the screen.  
(3) Press FN and select PAGE3.  
(4) Press SUPER NS.  
The  
indicator lights up on the screen.  
(5) Press EXIT to return to FN.  
To cancel Super NightShot  
Press SUPER NS again to make the indicator disappear. To cancel NightShot, slide  
NIGHTSHOT to OFF.  
Usin g t h e Nig h t Sh o t Lig h t  
The picture will be clearer with the NightShot Light on. To enable the NightShot Light,  
set N.S. LIGHT in  
to ON in the menu settings. (The default setting is ON.)  
Usin g Co lo r Slo w Sh u t t e r  
Color Slow Shutter enables you to record color images in a dim place.  
NIGHTSHOT  
ON  
OFF  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.  
(2) Slide NIGHTSHOT to OFF.  
(3) Press FN and select PAGE3.  
(4) Press COLOR SLW S.  
The  
indicator lights up on the screen.  
To cancel Color Slow Shutter  
Press COLOR SLW S again to make the  
indicator disappear.  
Notes  
• Do not use NightShot in bright places (e.g. the outdoors in the daytime). This may  
cause a malfunction.  
• While recording using the NightShot Light, attaching the lens hood may block the  
NightShot Light. Remove the lens hood when you use the NightShot Light.  
• If focusing is difficult while recording using NightShot, focus manually.  
• While recording using the NightShot Light, do not obstruct the Infrared rays  
(NightShot Light) emitter with your fingers.  
35  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
While using NightShot, you cannot use the follow ing functions:  
– White balance  
– PROGRAM AE  
(The indicator flashes.)  
– Manual exposure  
– Flexible Spot Meter  
HOLOGRAM AF  
While using Super NightShot or Color Slow Shutter  
The shutter speed is automatically adjusted depending on the brightness. At this time,  
the motion of the picture may slow down.  
While using Super NightShot, you cannot use the follow ing functions:  
– White balance  
– Fader  
– Digital effect  
– PROGRAM AE  
– Manual exposure  
– Flexible Spot Meter  
– Recording with the flash  
– Progressive Recording Mode  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY  
You cannot use the following functions:  
– Super NightShot  
– Color Slow Shutter  
NightShot Light  
• Invisible infrared beams of light are used for the NightShot Light. The maximum  
shooting distance using the NightShot Light is about 3 m (10 feet).  
• Attaching the lens hood (supplied) or a conversion lens (optional) may obstruct the  
infrared rays.  
While using Color Slow Shutter, you cannot use the follow ing functions:  
– Fader  
– Digital effect  
– PROGRAM AE  
– Manual exposure  
– Flexible Spot Meter  
– Recording with the flash  
– Progressive Recording Mode  
In total darkness  
Color Slow Shutter may not work normally.  
36  
Ch e ckin g re co rd in g s  
– En d se a rch /Ed it se a rch /Re c Re vie w  
You can use these buttons to check the recorded picture or shoot so that the transition  
between the last recorded scene and the next scene you record is smooth.  
EDITSEARCH  
FN  
En d se a rch  
You can go to the end of the recorded section after you record.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.  
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(3) Press END SCH.  
The last five seconds of the recorded section is played back and your  
camcorder returns to standby.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l e n d se a rch  
Press END SCH again.  
End search  
When you use a cassette without Cassette Memory, End search does not work once you  
eject the cassette after you have recorded on the tape. If you use a cassette with Cassette  
Memory, End search works even once you eject the cassette.  
If the tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions  
End search may not work correctly.  
37  
Ch e ckin g re co rd in g s – En d se a rch /Ed it se a rch /Re c Re vie w  
Ed it se a rch  
You can search for the next recording start point. You cannot monitor the sound.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.  
(2) Hold down EDITSEARCH. The recorded portion is played back.  
Release EDITSEARCH to stop playback. If you press START/ STOP, recording  
begins from the point you released EDITSEARCH.  
7 – :To go backwards  
+
:To go forwards  
Re c Re vie w  
You can check the last recorded section.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.  
(2) Press the 7 – side of EDITSEARCH momentarily.  
The section at which you have stopped recording most recently is played back  
for a few seconds, and then your camcorder returns to standby.  
38  
— Pla yb a ck – Ba sics —  
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e  
You can monitor the recorded tape on the LCD screen. If you close the LCD panel, you  
can monitor the playback picture in the viewfinder. You can also control playback using  
the Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR while pressing the small green button.  
(2) Press OPEN to open the LCD panel.  
(3) Press  
(4) Press  
to rewind the tape.  
to start playback.  
(5) Adjust the volume following the steps below.  
1 Press FN to display PAGE1.  
2 Press VOL. The screen to adjust the volume appears.  
3 Press – (to turn down the volume)/ + (to turn up the volume).  
4 Press  
OK to return to PAGE1.  
4
1
3
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
5
OK  
VOL  
+
2
The bar indicator  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To st o p p la yb a ck  
Press  
in the stop state.  
To re w in d t h e t a p e  
Press  
in the stop state.  
To fa st fo rw a rd t h e t a p e  
Press  
in the stop state.  
To vie w a st ill im a g e (p la yb a ck p a u se )  
Press  
during playback. To resume playback, press  
again. When playback  
pause lasts for about five minutes, your camcorder automatically enters the stop state.  
If you leave the pow er on for a long time  
Your camcorder gets warm. This is not a malfunction.  
39  
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e  
To d isp la y t h e scre e n in d ica t o rs – Disp la y fu n ct io n  
Press DISPLAY/ BATT INFO on your camcorder or DISPLAY on the Remote  
Commander supplied with your camcorder.  
The indicators disappear from the screen.  
To make the indicators appear, press DISPLAY/ BATT INFO or DISPLAY on the  
Remote Commander again.  
DISPLAY  
DATA CODE  
DISPLAY/  
BATT INFO  
Ab o u t d a t e /t im e a n d va rio u s se t t in g s  
Your camcorder automatically records not only images on the tape but also the  
recording data (date/ time or various settings when recorded) (Data code).  
Follow the steps below to display the data code using the touch panel or the Remote  
Commander.  
Usin g t h e t o u ch p a n e l  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR, then play back the tape.  
(2) During playback, press FN and select PAGE2.  
(3) Press DATA CODE.  
(4) Select CAM DATA or DATE DATA, then press  
OK.  
(5) Press EXIT.  
Date/time  
Various settings  
0:00:23:01  
0:00:23:01  
[a ]  
[b ]  
[c]  
[d ]  
50min  
50min  
AUTO  
60 AWB  
F1.8  
JUL  
4
2003  
12:05:56 PM  
9
dB  
[e ]  
[f ]  
[g ]  
[a ] Time code/ Tape counter  
[b ] SteadyShot off  
[c] Exposure  
[d ] White balance  
[e ] Gain  
[f] Shutter speed  
[g ] Aperture value  
40  
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e  
Usin g t h e Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r  
Press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander during playback.  
The display changes as follows each time you press DATA CODE:  
date/ time t various settings (SteadyShot off, exposure, white balance, gain,  
shutter speed, aperture value) t (no indicator)  
To n o t d isp la y t h e va rio u s se t t in g s  
Set DATA CODE in  
to DATE in the menu settings (p. 181).  
The display changes as follows each time you press DATA CODE on the Remote  
Commander:  
date/ time y (no indicator)  
Various settings  
Various settings show your camcorders recording information when you recorded.  
During recording, the various settings are not displayed.  
When you use data code, bars (-- -- --) appear if:  
– A blank portion of the tape is being played back.  
– The tape is unreadable due to tape damage or noise.  
– The tape was recorded by a camcorder without the date and time set.  
Data code  
When you connect your camcorder to a TV, the data code also appears on the TV  
screen.  
41  
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e  
Va rio u s p la yb a ck m o d e s  
To operate video control buttons, set the POWER switch to VCR.  
Usin g t h e t o u ch p a n e l  
(1) Press FN and select PAGE3.  
(2) Press V SPD PLAY to display video control buttons.  
To ch a n g e t h e p la yb a ck d ire ct io n  
Press  
during playback to reverse the playback direction.*  
To lo ca t e a sce n e w h ile m o n it o rin g t h e p ict u re (p ict u re se a rch )  
Keep pressing  
button.  
or  
during playback. To resume normal playback, release the  
To m o n it o r t h e h ig h -sp e e d p ict u re w h ile fa st fo rw a rd in g o r  
re w in d in g t h e t a p e (skip sca n )  
Keep pressing  
while fastforwarding or  
while rewinding the tape. To resume  
fastforwarding or rewinding, release the button.  
To vie w t h e p ict u re a t slo w sp e e d (slo w p la yb a ck)  
Press  
during playback.*  
For slow playback in the reverse direction, press  
, then press  
.*  
To vie w t h e p ict u re a t d o u b le sp e e d  
Press  
during playback.*  
For double speed playback in the reverse direction, press  
, then press  
.*  
To vie w t h e p ict u re fra m e -b y-fra m e  
Press  
during playback pause.**  
For frame-by-frame playback in the reverse direction, press  
.**  
To se a rch t h e la st re co rd e d sce n e (END SEARCH)  
Press END SCH on PAGE1 in the stop state. The last five seconds of the recorded  
section is played back, then your camcorder stops.  
* Press  
** Press  
to pause playback. Press  
to resume normal playback.  
to resume normal playback.  
42  
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e  
Video control buttons  
Marks on your camcorder are different from those on the Remote Commander supplied  
with your camcorder.  
On your camcorder:  
To play back or pause the tape  
To stop the tape  
To rewind the tape  
To fastforward the tape  
To play back the tape slowly  
To forward one frame at a time  
To rewind one frame at a time  
To play back the tape at double speed  
On the Remote Commander:  
N
X
To play back the tape  
To pause the tape  
x
To stop the tape  
m
M
y
To rewind the tape  
To fastforward the tape  
To play back the tape slowly  
C To forward one frame at a time  
c
×2  
To rewind one frame at a time  
To play back the tape at double speed  
In the various playback modes  
• Sound is muted.  
• The previous picture may remain as a mosaic image during playback.  
When you play back the tape in reverse  
Horizontal noise may appear at the center, or the top and bottom of the screen. This is  
not a malfunction.  
Slow playback  
Slow playback can be performed smoothly on your camcorder. However, this function  
does not work for an output signal from the DV Interface.  
43  
Vie w in g a re co rd in g o n t h e TV  
Connect your camcorder to the TV with the A/ V connecting cable supplied with your  
camcorder to watch the playback pictures on the TV screen. You can operate the video  
control buttons in the same way as when you view playback pictures on the LCD  
screen.  
When viewing the playback picture on the TV screen, we recommend that you power  
your camcorder from a wall outlet using the AC Adaptor. Refer to the operating  
instructions of your TV.  
Open the jack cover. Connect your camcorder to the TV with the A/ V connecting cable.  
Then set the TV/ VCR selector on the TV to VCR to be able to view images from your  
camcorder.  
S VIDEO  
AUDIO/  
VIDEO  
IN  
Yellow  
S VIDEO  
TV  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
A/ V connecting cable  
(supplied)  
Red  
White  
: Signal flow  
If yo u r TV is a lre a d y co n n e ct e d t o t h e VCR  
Connect your camcorder to the LINE IN input on the VCR with the A/ V connecting  
cable supplied with your camcorder. Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE.  
If yo u r TV o r VCR is a m o n a u ra l t yp e  
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video input jack and the  
white or the red plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or the TV.  
If you connect the white plug, the sound is L (left) signal. If you connect the red plug,  
the sound is R (right) signal.  
44  
Vie w in g a re co rd in g o n t h e TV  
If the equipment to be connected has an S video jack  
• Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional). With  
this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V  
connecting cable.  
Connect the S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks on both your camcorder and  
the equipment to be connected.  
This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures.  
• The sound is not output on the other equipment if your camcorder is connected with  
an S video cable (optional) only. Use the A/ V connecting cable along with an S video  
cable.  
To display the screen indicators on the TV  
Set DISPLAY in  
to V-OUT/ LCD in the menu settings (p. 181). To make the screen  
indicators disappear, press DISPLAY/ BATT INFO on your camcorder.  
45  
— Ad va n ce d Re co rd in g Op e ra t io n s —  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”  
d u rin g t a p e re co rd in g st a n d b y o r t a p e re co rd in g  
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder beforehand.  
Du rin g t a p e re co rd in g st a n d b y  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
(1) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly until a still image appears. The CAPTURE  
indicator appears. Recording does not start yet. To change the still image,  
release PHOTO, select a still image again, and then press and hold PHOTO  
lightly.  
(2) Press PHOTO deeply.  
Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.  
The image displayed on the screen when you press PHOTO deeply is recorded  
in the currently displayed folder (p. 129) in the “Memory Stick.”  
FINE  
640  
12  
CAPTURE  
1
2
PHOTO  
1 0 1  
FINE  
640  
1 0 1  
PHOTO  
Du rin g t a p e re co rd in g  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
Press PHOTO deeply.  
The image displayed on the screen when you press PHOTO deeply is recorded on the  
“Memory Stick.”  
Recording on the “Memory Stick” is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.  
46  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” d u rin g t a p e re co rd in g  
st a n d b y o r t a p e re co rd in g  
Note  
You cannot record still images on the “Memory Stick” during following operations  
(The  
indicator flashes):  
– End search  
– Wide mode  
– While using BOUNCE  
– Progressive Recording Mode  
– MEMORY MIX  
“Memory Stick”  
See page 102 for details.  
Still images  
• Image size is automatically set to 640 × 480.  
• If the POWER switch is set to CAMERA, image quality cannot be changed. The image  
quality when you have set the POWER switch to MEMORY is used (p. 105).  
• When recording images with a higher quality, we recommend using the Memory  
Photo recording (p. 109).  
While and after recording still images on the “Memory Stick”  
Your camcorder continues recording on the tape.  
When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander  
Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press  
the button.  
To record still images on a “Memory Stick” during tape recording  
You cannot check an image on the screen by pressing PHOTO lightly. The image when  
you press PHOTO will be recorded on the “Memory Stick.”  
Title  
You cannot record the titles.  
Self-timer recording  
During recording standby, you can record still images on the “Memory Stick” with the  
self-timer. See page 48 for details.  
Recording w ith the flash  
During recording standby, you can record still images on the “Memory Stick” with the  
flash. See page 113 for details.  
47  
Se lf-t im e r re co rd in g  
You can record still images or moving pictures using the self-timer. You can also use the  
Remote Commander for this operation.  
START/STOP  
PHOTO  
PHOTO  
START/STOP  
Re co rd in g o n a t a p e  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) During standby, press FN and select PAGE2.  
(2) Press SELFTIMER.  
The  
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.  
(3) Press EXIT to return to FN.  
(4) Press START/ STOP.  
The self-timer starts counting down from about 10 while beeping. In the last  
two seconds of the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts  
automatically.  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” d u rin g re co rd in g  
st a n d b y  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Follow Step 1 to 3 in “Recording on a tape.”  
(2) Press PHOTO deeply.  
The self-timer starts counting down from about 10 while beeping. In the last  
two seconds of the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts  
automatically.  
To st o p t h e co u n t d o w n d u rin g re co rd in g o n t h e t a p e  
Press START/ STOP. To restart the countdown, press START/ STOP again.  
To ca n ce l t h e se lf-t im e r  
During standby, press SELFTIMER and the  
(self-timer) indicator disappears from  
the screen. You cannot cancel the self-timer using the Remote Commander.  
When the self-timer recording is finished  
The self-timer is automatically canceled.  
Self-timer recording  
You can record using the self-timer only during recording standby.  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY  
You can also record still images on the “Memory Stick” with the self-timer (p. 124).  
48  
Ad ju st in g t h e w h it e b a la n ce m a n u a lly  
Normally the white balance is automatically adjusted.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
or  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU.  
(3) Select WHT BAL in  
, then press EXEC.  
EXIT  
MANUAL SET  
PROGRAM AE  
P
EFFECT  
RED EYE  
R
FLASH LVL  
WHT BAL  
SHARPNESS  
AUTO SHTR  
AUTO  
HOLD  
OUTDOOR  
INDOOR  
EXEC  
RET.  
(4) Select a desired mode, then press EXEC.  
HOLD:  
When recording a single-colored subject or background.  
OUTDOOR ( ):  
• When recording a sunset/ sunrise, just after sunset, just before sunrise, neon signs, or  
fireworks.  
• Under daylight fluorescent lamps  
INDOOR (n):  
• When lighting conditions change quickly.  
• In too bright places such as photography studios  
• Under sodium lamps or mercury lamps  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o m a t ic w h it e b a la n ce  
Set WHT BAL to AUTO.  
If the picture is being taken in a studio lit by TV lighting  
We recommend that you record in the INDOOR mode.  
When you record under fluorescent lighting  
Select AUTO or HOLD.  
Your camcorder may not adjust the white balance correctly in the INDOOR mode.  
In the AUTO mode  
Point your camcorder at the white subject for about 10 seconds after setting the POWER  
switch to CAMERA to get better adjustment when:  
– You remove the battery pack for replacement.  
– You bring your camcorder outdoors from the interior of a house holding the exposure,  
or vice versa.  
In the HOLD mode  
Set WHT BAL to AUTO and reset to HOLD after few seconds when:  
– You change the mode of PROGRAM AE.  
49  
– You bring your camcorder outdoors from the interior of a house, or vice versa.  
Usin g t h e w id e m o d e  
You can enjoy recording with wider angles compared to the normal tape recording  
while the power zoom lever is moved to the “W” side.  
You can record a 16:9 wide picture to watch on a 16:9 wide-screen TV (16:9WIDE).  
Black bands appear on the screen during recording in the 16:9WIDE mode [a ]. The  
picture during playing back in the 4:3 mode on a wide-screen TV [b ] or a normal TV  
[c]* is compressed in the widthwise direction. If you set the screen mode of the wide-  
screen TV to the full mode, you can watch pictures of normal images [d ].  
* The picture played back in the wide mode on a normal TV appears the same as the  
picture played back in the wide mode on your camcorder [a ].  
[b ]  
[c]  
[d ]  
[a ]  
16:9WIDE  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) During recording standby, press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU.  
(3) Select 16:9WIDE in  
, then press EXEC.  
(4) Select ON, then press EXEC.  
EXIT  
CAMERA SET  
D ZOOM  
16:9WIDE  
STEADYSHOT  
N. S. LIGHT  
ON  
EXEC  
RET.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l t h e w id e m o d e  
Set 16:9WIDE to OFF.  
50  
Usin g t h e w id e m o d e  
Notes  
• In the wide mode, you cannot operate the following functions:  
– Recording still images on the “Memory Stick” during tape recording or tape  
recording standby  
– BOUNCE  
– OLD MOVIE  
– Progressive Recording Mode  
• Pictures recorded in the wide mode on the tape cannot be changed to normal size.  
Connection for a TV  
Pictures recorded in the 16:9WIDE mode automatically appear on the TV screen at full  
size when:  
– You connect your camcorder to a TV compatible with the video ID (ID-1/ ID-2)  
system.  
– You connect your camcorder to the S video jack on a TV.  
ID-1 system  
The ID-1 system sends aspect ratio information (16:9, 4:3, or letter box) with video  
signals. If you connect a TV compatible with the ID-1 system, the screen size is  
automatically selected.  
ID-2 system  
The ID-2 system sends a copyright protection signal with ID-1 signals inserted between  
video signals when you connect your camcorder to other equipment using the A/ V  
connecting cable.  
51  
Usin g t h e fa d e r fu n ct io n  
You can fade in or out to give your recording a professional appearance.  
[a ]  
STBY  
REC  
NORM. FADER  
(normal)  
MOSC. FADER  
(mosaic)  
BOUNCE1) 2)  
OVERLAP2)  
WIPE2)  
DOT2)  
[b ]  
STBY  
REC  
MONOTONE  
When fading in, the picture gradually changes from black-and-white to color.  
When fading out, the picture gradually changes from color to black-and-white.  
1) You can use BOUNCE when D ZOOM in  
2) You can fade in only.  
is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
52  
Usin g t h e fa d e r fu n ct io n  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
Operate by touching the panel.  
(1) When fading in [a ]  
Press FN to display PAGE1 during recording standby.  
When fading out [b ]  
Press FN to display PAGE1 during recording.  
(2) Press FADER. The screen to select the fader mode appears.  
(3) Press a desired mode.  
(4) Press  
OK to return to PAGE1.  
(5) Press EXIT to return to FN.  
The fader indicator you selected flashes.  
(6) Press START/ STOP.  
After the fade in/ out is carried out, your camcorder automatically returns to  
the normal mode.  
2
FADER  
FADER  
OFF  
OK  
MOSC.  
FADER  
NORM.  
FADER  
BOUN–  
CE  
START/STOP  
MONO– OVER– WIPE DOT  
TONE LAP  
To ca n ce l t h e fa d e in /o u t  
Before pressing START/ STOP, press  
OFF on the FADER screen to return to PAGE1.  
53  
Usin g t h e fa d e r fu n ct io n  
Note  
You cannot use the following functions while using fader. Also, you cannot use fader  
while using following functions:  
– Super NightShot  
– Color Slow Shutter  
– Digital effect  
– Recording with the flash  
– Interval Recording  
– Frame recording  
When you select OVERLAP, WIPE or DOT  
Your camcorder automatically stores the image recorded on the tape. As the image is  
being stored, the image on the screen disappears.  
While using BOUNCE, you cannot use the follow ing functions:  
– Zoom  
– Picture effect  
– PROGRAM AE  
– Manual exposure  
– Flexible Spot Meter  
– Manual focus  
– Recording still images on the “Memory Stick”  
Note on the BOUNCE mode  
You cannot select BOUNCE in the followings:  
– When D ZOOM is activated in the menu settings.  
– Wide mode  
– Picture effect  
– PROGRAM AE  
– Progressive Recording Mode  
54  
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s – Pict u re e ffe ct  
NEG. ART [a ] : The color and brightness of the picture are reversed.  
SEPIA :  
The picture appears in sepia.  
B&W :  
The picture appears in monochrome (black-and-white).  
SOLARIZE [b ] : The picture looks like as an illustration with strong contrast.  
PASTEL [c] : The picture looks like a pale pastel drawing.  
MOSAIC [d ] : The picture appears mosaic-patterned.  
[a ]  
[b ]  
[c]  
[d ]  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU.  
(3) Select P EFFECT in  
, then press EXEC.  
EXIT  
MANUAL SET  
PROGRAM AE  
P
EFFECT  
OFF  
RED EYE  
R
NEG. ART  
SEPIA  
FLASH LVL  
WHT BAL  
B&W  
SHARPNESS  
AUTO SHTR  
SOLARIZE  
PASTEL  
MOSAIC  
EXEC  
RET.  
(4) Select a desired mode, then press EXEC.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l p ict u re e ffe ct  
Set P EFFECT to OFF.  
Note  
While using picture effect, you cannot use following functions:  
– BOUNCE  
– OLD MOVIE  
55  
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s – Dig it a l e ffe ct  
SLOW SHTR (slow shutter)  
You can slow down the shutter speed. The SLOW SHTR mode is suitable for shooting a  
subject in a dark place more brightly.  
STILL  
You can record a still image so that it is superimposed on a moving picture.  
OLD MOVIE  
You can add an old movie type atmosphere to pictures. Your camcorder automatically  
sets the 16:9WIDE mode to ON, picture effect to SEPIA, and sets the appropriate shutter  
speed.  
FLASH (flash motion)  
You can record still images successively at regular intervals.  
LUMI. (luminance key)  
You can swap the brighter area in a still image with a moving picture.  
TRAIL  
You can record a picture so that an incidental image like a trail is left.  
Still image  
Still image  
Moving picture  
Moving picture  
STILL  
LUMI.  
56  
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s – Dig it a l e ffe ct  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN and select PAGE2.  
(2) Press DIG EFFT. The screen to select a digital effect is displayed.  
(3) Press a desired mode. When you select STILL or LUMI., the still image when  
you have selected the mode is stored in memory.  
(4) Press – (to decrease the effect)/ + (to increase the effect) to adjust the effect.  
Items to adjust  
SLOW SHTR Shutter speed. The larger the shutter speed number, the slower the  
shutter speed.  
STILL  
The rate of the still image you want to superimpose on the moving  
picture  
OLD MOVIE No adjustment necessary  
FLASH  
LUMI.  
The interval of frame by frame playback  
The color scheme of the area in the still image which is to be swapped  
with a moving picture  
TRAIL  
The vanishing time of the incidental image  
(5) Press  
OK to return to PAGE2.  
2
4
DIG EFFT  
OFF  
DIG EFFT  
OFF  
DIG  
OK  
OK  
EFFT  
SLOW  
SHTR MOVIE  
OLD  
LUMI.  
STILL  
FLASH LUMI.  
TRAIL  
+
[a ]  
[a ] The bar appears when setting the following digital  
effect modes: STILL, FLASH, LUMI., TRAIL.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l d ig it a l e ffe ct  
Press  
OFF on the DIG EFFT screen to return to PAGE2.  
57  
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s – Dig it a l e ffe ct  
Shutter speed  
Shutter speed number  
SLOW SHTR 1  
Shutter speed  
1/ 30  
1/ 15  
1/ 8  
SLOW SHTR 2  
SLOW SHTR 3  
SLOW SHTR 4  
1/ 4  
Notes  
• While using digital effect, you cannot use the following functions:  
– Super NightShot  
– Color Slow Shutter  
– Fader  
• PROGRAM AE does not work in the SLOW SHTR mode.  
• The following functions do not work in the OLD MOVIE mode:  
– Wide mode  
– Picture effect  
– PROGRAM AE  
When recording in the SLOW SHTR mode  
Autofocus may not be effective. Focus manually using a tripod.  
58  
Usin g PROGRAM AE  
SPOTLIGHT *  
This mode prevents peoples faces, for example, from appearing excessively white  
when shooting subjects lit by strong light in the theater.  
PORTRAIT (soft portrait)  
This mode brings out the subject while creating a soft background for subjects such as  
people or flowers.  
SPORTS (sports lesson) *  
This mode minimizes shake on fast-moving subjects such as in tennis or golf.  
BEACH&SKI *  
This mode prevents peoples faces from appearing dark in strong light or reflected light,  
such as at a beach in midsummer or on a ski slope.  
SUNSETMOON (sunset & moon) **  
This mode allows you to maintain atmosphere when you are recording sunsets, general  
night views, fireworks displays and neon signs.  
LANDSCAPE **  
This mode is for when you are recording distant subjects such as mountains. Also it  
prevents your camcorder from focusing on glass or metal mesh in windows when you  
are recording a subject behind glass or a screen.  
*
Your camcorder focuses only on subjects in the middle to far distance.  
** Your camcorder focuses only on distant subject.  
59  
Usin g PROGRAM AE  
The POWER switch should be set to  
or  
.
Operate by touching the panel.  
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU.  
(3) Select PROGRAM AE in  
, then press EXEC.  
EXIT  
MANUAL SET  
PROGRAM AE AUTO  
P
EFFECT  
SPOTLIGHT  
RED EYE  
R
PORTRAIT  
FLASH LVL  
WHT BAL  
SPORTS  
BEACH&SKI  
SUNSETMOON  
LANDSCAPE  
SHARPNESS  
AUTO SHTR  
EXEC  
RET.  
(4) Select a desired mode, then press EXEC.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l PROGRAM AE  
Set PROGRAM AE to AUTO.  
Notes  
• The following functions do not work while using PROGRAM AE:  
– Color Slow Shutter  
– BOUNCE  
– SLOW SHTR  
– OLD MOVIE  
– Spot Focus  
• PROGRAM AE does not work in the following cases (The indicator flashes):  
NightShot  
– To record images on the “Memory Stick” using MEMORY MIX  
• When you set the POWER switch to MEMORY, the SPORTS mode does not work.  
(The indicator flashes.)  
60  
Ad ju st in g t h e e xp o su re m a n u a lly  
Adjust the exposure manually in the following cases:  
– When you need a fine adjustment for backlit subjects.  
– When the subject is too bright against the background.  
– When recording dark pictures (e.g. night scenes) faithfully.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
or  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press EXPOSURE. The screen to adjust the exposure appears.  
(3) Press MANUAL.  
(4) Adjust the exposure using – (to dim) / + (to brighten).  
(5) Press  
OK to return to PAGE1.  
2
4
EXPO–  
AUTO  
OK  
AUTO  
OK  
SURE  
MANU–  
AL  
MANU–  
AL  
EXPOSURE  
EXPOSURE  
+
+
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o m a t ic e xp o su re  
Press  
AUTO on the EXPOSURE screen to return to PAGE1.  
Note  
When you adjust the exposure manually, the following functions do not work:  
– Back light  
– Color Slow Shutter  
61  
Usin g t h e sp o t lig h t -m e t e rin g fu n ct io n  
– Fle xib le Sp o t Me t e r  
You can take a picture with the appropriate exposure automatically adjusted for just the  
point you want to focus on and with its exposure fixed.  
Use Flexible Spot Meter in the following cases:  
– The subject is backlit.  
– When there is strong contrast between the subject and background such as with a  
subject that is on stage and lit by a spotlight.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
or  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press SPOT METER. The SPOT METER screen appears.  
(3) Press the desired area in the frame on the screen.  
The SPOT METER indicator flashes on the screen. The exposure of the point  
you selected is adjusted.  
(4) Press  
OK to return to PAGE1.  
2
SPOT  
SPOT METER  
METER  
AUTO  
OK  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o m a t ic e xp o su re  
Press  
AUTO in the SPOT METER screen to return to PAGE1.  
Note  
The following functions do not work while using Flexible Spot Meter:  
– Back light  
– Color Slow Shutter  
– Spot focus  
62  
Fo cu sin g m a n u a lly  
You can gain better results by manually adjusting the focus in the following cases.  
Normally, focus is automatically adjusted.  
When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY, you can adjust the focus manually with  
the image enlarged to twice the size (Expanded focus).  
Adjust the focus manually in the following cases:  
• The autofocus mode is not effective when shooting:  
– Subjects through glass coated with water droplets  
Horizontal stripes  
– Subjects with little contrast with backgrounds such as walls or the sky  
• Shooting a stationary subject when using a tripod.  
• When you want to change the focus from a subject in the foreground to a subject in  
the background.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
or  
.
(1) Press FOCUS.  
The 9 (focus) indicator appears on the screen.  
(2) Turn the focus ring to sharpen focus.  
2
Focus ring  
FOCUS  
To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o fo cu s  
Press FOCUS to turn off the 9,  
or  
indicator.  
Ab o u t e xp a n d e d fo cu s  
If you set EXPANDED F in  
switch is set to MEMORY, the  
to ON in the menu settings (p. 174) when the POWER  
(expanded focus) indicator appears. At this time the  
image is enlarged to approximately twice the size. The focal distance information is also  
displayed. After adjustment is complete, the image returns to its original size  
automatically.  
63  
Fo cu sin g m a n u a lly  
To focus precisely  
It is easier to focus on the subject if you adjust the zoom to shoot at the “W” (wide-  
angle) position after focusing at the “T” (telephoto) position.  
When you shoot close to the subject  
Focus at the end of the “W” (wide-angle) position.  
9 changes as follow s:  
when recording a distant subject.  
when the subject is too close to focus on.  
Focal distance information is displayed for about three seconds on the screen in  
the follow ing cases:  
– When switching the focus adjustment mode from autofocus to manual.  
– When turning the focus ring.  
Focal distance information  
You cannot get correct information if you have attached a conversion lens (optional) to  
your camcorder.  
64  
Usin g t h e sp o t fo cu s fu n ct io n – Sp o t Fo cu s  
You can take a picture with the appropriate focus automatically adjusted for just the  
point you want to focus on and with its focus fixed.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
or  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press SPOT FOCUS. The SPOT FOCUS screen appears.  
(3) Press the desired area in the frame on the screen.  
The SPOT FOCUS indicator flashes on the screen. The focus of the point you  
selected is adjusted.  
(4) Press  
OK to return to PAGE1.  
2
SPOT  
SPOT FOCUS  
FOCUS  
AUTO  
OK  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o fo cu s  
Press  
AUTO in the SPOT FOCUS screen to return to PAGE1.  
Notes  
• The back light function does not work while using Spot Focus.  
• You cannot use Spot Focus while using PROGRAM AE.  
Focal distance information  
It is not displayed on the screen.  
65  
In t e rva l Re co rd in g  
You can make a time-lapse recording by setting your camcorder to automatically record  
and switch to standby sequentially. You can achieve an excellent recording for  
flowering, emergence of insects, etc. with this function.  
Example  
1 s  
1 s  
9 min 59 s  
9 min 59 s  
[a ]  
[a ]  
[b ]  
[b ]  
10 min  
10 min  
[a ] REC TIME  
[b ] INTERVAL  
There may be a discrepancy in recording time of up to +/ – six frames from the selected  
time.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU.  
(3) Select INT. REC in  
, then press EXEC.  
(4) Select SET, then press EXEC.  
(5) Select INTERVAL, then press EXEC.  
(6) Select a desired interval time, then press EXEC.  
The time: 30SEC y 1MIN y 5MIN y 10MIN  
(7) Select REC TIME, then press EXEC.  
(8) Select a desired recording time, then press EXEC.  
The time: 0.5SEC y 1SEC y 1.5SEC y 2SEC  
(9) Press  
RET.  
(10) Set INT. REC to ON, then press EXEC.  
(11) Press EXIT to return to FN.  
The INTERVAL TAPE indicator flashes on the screen.  
(12) Press START/ STOP to start Interval Recording.  
The INTERVAL TAPE indicator lights up during Interval Recording.  
4
5
7
TAPE SET  
I NT. REC  
TAPE SET  
I NT. REC  
I NTERVAL  
REC TIME  
EXIT  
EXIT  
TAPE SET  
I NT. REC  
I NTERVAL 30SEC  
REC TIME  
EXIT  
I NTERVAL 30SEC  
REC TIME  
1MIN  
5MIN  
10MIN  
0 . 5SEC  
1SEC  
1. 5SEC  
2SEC  
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
RET.  
To ca n ce l In t e rva l Re co rd in g  
Set INT. REC to OFF.  
66  
Fra m e b y fra m e re co rd in g  
– Fra m e re co rd in g  
You can make a recording with a stop-motion animated effect using frame recording.  
To create this effect, alternately move the subject a little and make frame recording. We  
recommend that you use a tripod, and operate your camcorder using the Remote  
Commander after Step 6 to prevent camera shake.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU.  
(3) Select FRAME REC in  
, then press EXEC.  
EXIT  
TAPE SET  
REC MODE  
AUDI O MODE  
REMAIN  
FRAME REC  
I NT. REC  
OFF  
ON  
EXEC  
RET.  
(4) Select ON, then press EXEC.  
(5) Press EXIT to return to FN.  
The FRAME REC indicator lights up.  
(6) Press START/ STOP to start frame recording. Your camcorder makes a  
recording for about six frames, and returns to recording standby.  
(7) Move the subject, and repeat Step 6.  
To ca n ce l fra m e re co rd in g  
Set FRAME REC to OFF.  
Note  
The remaining tape time is not indicated correctly if you use frame recording  
continuously.  
When using frame recording  
The last recorded frame is longer than other frames.  
67  
Re co rd in g w it h a ll t h e p ixe ls  
– Pro g re ssive Re co rd in g Mo d e  
To import moving pictures to your computer to view still images, we recommend you  
record in Progressive Recording Mode. To use Progressive Recording Mode, follow the  
procedure below. Still images produced this way are more stable than those recorded  
on a tape in normal mode, and thus are more suitable for analyzing high-speed action  
such as sports scenes. (Since your camcorder takes in an image every 1/ 30 of a second  
in Progressive Recording Mode, moving pictures recorded in this mode may be subject  
to too much jitter. To view moving pictures, we recommend recording in normal  
mode.)  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN and select PAGE3.  
(2) Press PRGRE REC.  
To ca n ce l t h e Pro g re ssive Re co rd in g Mo d e  
Press PRGRE REC again.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
Note on the Progressive Recording Mode  
The normal TV broadcast divides the screen into two finer fields and displays them in  
turns every 1/ 60 of a second. Thus, the actual image displayed in an instant covers only  
half of the apparent image area. Displaying the whole image simultaneously on a full  
screen is called displaying with all the pixels. In this function the picture is clearer than  
one in normal function, but moving objects appear jerky since the picture is read/  
output every about 1/ 30 second.  
When recording under fluorescent light  
When recording in the Progressive Recording Mode under fluorescent light or light  
bulb, a rare phenomenon may happen in which the screen lights up brightly (Flicker  
phenomenon). This is not a malfunction. If you want to stop this phenomenon, cancel  
the Progressive Recording Mode.  
When you record w ith Progressive Recording Mode  
The angle of view is slightly larger than normal recording.  
While in Progressive Recording Mode, you cannot use the follow ing functions:  
– Digital Zoom  
– Wide mode  
– BOUNCE  
– Slow Shutter  
– OLD MOVIE  
– Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” during tape recording standby or tape  
recording  
– SteadyShot  
68  
Usin g t h e vie w fin d e r  
Turn the LCD panel over and move it back to your camcorder body with the LCD  
screen facing out. You can operate with the touch panel using the viewfinder.  
Use the viewfinder when operating camera brightness and fader on the touch panel.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
or  
.
(1) Turn the LCD panel over and move it back to your camcorder body with the  
LCD screen facing out.  
(2) Press  
OFF. The PANEL OFF indicator appears on the screen.  
(3) Press OK. The LCD screen is turned off.  
(4) Using the viewfinder, press the LCD screen. EXPOSURE,  
OK,  
ON and  
FADER (only when the POWER switch is set to CAMERA) appear.  
(5) Press the LCD screen and select a desired item, then press  
OK.  
EXPOSURE: Adjust the exposure by pressing –/ +.  
FADER:  
Press FADER repeatedly until a desired fader mode appears.  
The indicator changes as follows:  
FADER t M. FADER t BOUNCE t MONOTONE  
(no indicator) T DOT  
T
WIPE  
T
OVERLAP  
ON:  
The LCD screen lights up.  
When the POWER  
switch is set to CAMERA  
View finder  
4
EXPO–  
SURE  
OK  
ON  
FADER  
When the POWER  
switch is set to MEMORY  
EXPO–  
SURE  
OK  
ON  
To m a ke t h e b u t t o n s o n t h e LCD scre e n d isa p p e a r  
Press  
OK.  
69  
Usin g t h e vie w fin d e r  
Note  
When the POWER switch is set to VCR or during memory playback, you cannot  
operate with the touch panel using the viewfinder.  
To operate the items that do not appear  
Set the LCD panel back to the normal position. Operate the items using the LCD screen.  
Available recording time  
This is the time when you record pictures using the viewfinder (p. 17).  
70  
— Ad va n ce d Pla yb a ck Op e ra t io n s —  
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e w it h p ict u re e ffe ct  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) During playback or playback pause, press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU.  
(3) Select P EFFECT in  
, then press EXEC.  
EXIT  
MANUAL SET  
EFFECT  
P
OFF  
NEG. ART  
SEPIA  
B&W  
SOLARIZE  
EXEC  
RET.  
(4) Select a desired mode, then press EXEC.  
You can use NEG. ART, SEPIA, B&W and SOLARIZE.  
See page 55 for details on each mode.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l p ict u re e ffe ct  
Set P EFFECT to OFF.  
Notes  
• You cannot process externally input scenes using picture effect.  
• You cannot record images processed with picture effect on the tape on your  
camcorder. Record the processed images on the “Memory Stick” (p. 116, 125), or on a  
VCR using your camcorder as a player.  
Pictures processed w ith picture effect  
Pictures processed with picture effect are not output through the DV Interface.  
71  
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e w it h d ig it a l e ffe ct  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) During playback or playback pause, press FN and select PAGE2.  
(2) Press DIG EFFT. The screen to select a digital effect is displayed.  
(3) Select a desired mode. You can use STILL, FLASH, LUMI. and TRAIL.  
See pages 56, 57 for details on each mode. When you select STILL or LUMI.,  
the picture where you select the mode is stored in memory as a still image.  
(4) Press –/ + to adjust the effect.  
(5) Press  
OK to return to PAGE2.  
2
DIG EFFT  
OFF  
DIG  
OK  
EFFT  
STILL FLASH LUMI. TRAIL  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l d ig it a l e ffe ct  
Press  
OFF to return to PAGE2.  
Notes  
• You cannot process externally input scenes using digital effect.  
• You cannot record images processed with digital effect on the tape on your  
camcorder. Record the processed images on the “Memory Stick” (p. 116, 125), or on a  
VCR using your camcorder as a player.  
Pictures processed w ith digital effect  
Pictures processed with digital effect are not output through the DV Interface.  
72  
En la rg in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n t h e t a p e  
Ta p e PB ZOOM  
Besides the operation described here, your camcorder can enlarge still images recorded  
on the “Memory Stick” (p. 135).  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) During playback or playback pause, press FN and select PAGE2.  
(2) Press PB ZOOM. The PB ZOOM screen appears.  
(3) Press the area you want to enlarge in the frame.  
The area you have pressed moves to the center of the screen, and the playback  
image is enlarged to approximately at twice the size. If you press another area  
again, the area moves to the center of the screen.  
(4) Adjust the zoom ratio by the power zoom lever.  
You can select the zoom ratio from approximately 1.1 times up to five times its  
size.  
W : To decrease the zoom ratio  
T : To increase the zoom ratio  
Pow er zoom lever  
2
PB ZOOM  
PB  
ZOOM  
END  
To ca n ce l t a p e PB ZOOM  
Press  
END.  
Notes  
• You cannot process externally input scenes using tape PB ZOOM with your  
camcorder.  
• You cannot record images processed with tape PB ZOOM on the tape on your  
camcorder. Record the processed images on a “Memory Stick” (p. 116) or on a VCR  
using your camcorder as a player.  
• You cannot record moving pictures processed with tape PB ZOOM on the “Memory  
Stick” on your camcorder.  
Images in tape PB ZOOM  
Images in tape PB ZOOM are not output through the DV Interface.  
In tape PB ZOOM  
If you press DISPLAY/ BATT INFO, the frame on the PB ZOOM screen disappears. You  
cannot move the part you have pressed to the center of the screen.  
Edge of the image  
The edge of the image cannot be displayed at the center of the screen.  
73  
Qu ickly lo ca t in g a sce n e  
– Ze ro se t m e m o ry  
Your camcorder automatically searches for a desired scene having the tape counter  
value of “0:00:00”. Use the Remote Commander for this operation.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
(1) During playback, press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander at  
the point you want to locate later. The tape counter shows “0:00:00”, then starts  
counting. If the indicators do not appear, press DISPLAY. The ZERO SET  
MEMORY indicator flashes.  
(2) Press x when you want to stop playback.  
(3) Press m to rewind the tape to the tape counters zero point. The tape stops  
automatically when the tape counter reaches approximately zero.  
(4) Press N. Playback starts from the counters zero point.  
ZERO SET MEMORY  
DISPLAY  
N
m
x
Notes  
• When you press ZERO SET MEMORY before rewinding the tape, the zero set memory  
function will be canceled.  
• There may be a discrepancy of several seconds between the time code and the tape  
counter.  
• The ZERO SET MEMORY indicator disappears when you press FN.  
If the tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions  
The zero set memory function may not work correctly.  
74  
Se a rch in g t h e b o u n d a rie s o f t h e re co rd e d  
t a p e b y t it le Tit le se a rch  
Use a cassette with Cassette Memory for this operation.  
Use the Remote Commander for this operation.  
Before operation  
Set CM SEARCH in  
to ON in the menu settings. (The default setting is ON.)  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
(1) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander until the TITLE SEARCH  
indicator appears.  
The TITLE SEARCH screen appears.  
The indicator changes as follows:  
TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t (no indicator)  
(2) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the title for playback.  
Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the scene having the title that  
you selected.  
1
SEARCH  
MODE  
TITLE SEARCH  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
HAPPY NEW YEAR!  
PRESENT  
GOOD MORNING  
WEDDING  
NIGHT  
BASEBALL  
[b ] [a ]  
[a ] Actual point you are trying to search for  
[b ] Present point on the tape  
To ca n ce l se a rch in g  
Press x on the Remote Commander.  
If the tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions  
Title search may not work correctly.  
To superimpose a title  
See page 97.  
75  
Se a rch in g a re co rd in g b y d a t e  
– Da t e se a rch  
When you search for the date by using Cassette Memory, cue the tape by selecting the  
recording date on the screen.  
When you search for the date without using Cassette Memory, cue the tape to changing  
point of recording date. Use the Remote Commander for this operation.  
Se a rch in g fo r t h e d a t e b y u sin g Ca sse t t e Me m o ry  
Before operation  
• You can use this function only when playing back a cassette with Cassette Memory.  
• Set CM SEARCH in  
to ON in the menu settings. (The default setting is ON.)  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
(1) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the DATE  
SEARCH indicator appears.  
The DATE SEARCH screen appears.  
The indicator changes as follows:  
TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t (no indicator)  
(2) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the date for playback.  
Your camcorder automatically starts playback at the beginning of the selected  
date.  
1
SEARCH  
MODE  
DATE SEARCH  
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
SEP / 5 / 03  
SEP / 6 / 03  
DEC / 24 / 03  
JAN / 1 / 04  
FEB / 11 / 04  
APR / 29 / 04  
[b ] [a ]  
[a ] Actual point you are trying to search for  
[b ] Present point on the tape  
To ca n ce l se a rch in g  
Press x on the Remote Commander.  
76  
Se a rch in g a re co rd in g b y d a t e – Da t e se a rch  
Se a rch in g fo r t h e d a t e w it h o u t u sin g Ca sse t t e Me m o ry  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU.  
(3) Select CM SEARCH in  
, then press EXEC.  
EXIT  
CM SET  
T I TLE  
T I TLEERASE  
T I TLE DSPL  
CM SEARCH ON  
TAPE T I TLE OFF  
ERASE ALL  
EXEC  
RET.  
(4) Select OFF, then press EXEC.  
(5) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander until the DATE SEARCH  
indicator appears.  
(6) Press . on the Remote Commander to search for the previous date or press  
> on the Remote Commander to search for the next date. Your camcorder  
automatically starts playback at the point where the date changes. Each time  
you press . or >, your camcorder searches for the previous or next date.  
To ca n ce l se a rch in g  
Press x on the Remote Commander or  
on your camcorder.  
Note  
If one days recording is less than two minutes, your camcorder may not accurately find  
the point where the recording date changes.  
If the tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions  
Date search may not work correctly.  
Cassette Memory  
The cassette with Cassette Memory can hold six recording date data. If you search the  
date among seven or more data, see “Searching for the date without using Cassette  
Memory.”  
77  
— Ed it in g —  
Du b b in g a t a p e  
You can dub or edit on the VCR connected to your camcorder using your camcorder as  
a player.  
You can connect either the A/ V connecting cable (supplied) or i.LINK cable (optional).  
If you connect with the i.LINK cable (optional), video and audio signals are transmitted  
in digital form for high-quality editing.  
Titles, screen indicators, Cassette Memory contents, and letters on the “Memory Stick”  
index screen cannot be recorded.  
Co n n e ct in g t o t h e VCR  
You can edit on VCRs that support the following systems:  
8 mm , Hi8 , Digital8 , VHS , S-VHS , VHSC  
Betamax , ED Betamax , mini DV , DV or MICRO MV  
, S-VHSC  
,
.
Co n n e ct in g w it h t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le  
S VIDEO  
Yellow  
White  
AUDIO/  
VIDEO  
IN  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VCR  
Red  
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)  
: Signal flow  
Co n n e ct in g w it h t h e i.LINK ca b le  
DV Interface  
i.LINK  
i.LINK cable (optional)  
: Signal flow  
78  
Du b b in g a t a p e  
If your VCR is a monaural type  
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video input jack and the  
white or the red plug to the audio input jack on the VCR. When the white plug is  
connected, the left channel audio is output, and when the red plug is connected, the  
right channel audio is output.  
If your VCR has an S VIDEO jack  
See page 45 for details.  
About the i.LINK connecting  
See page 199 for details.  
Pictures processed w ith picture effect, digital effect or PB ZOOM  
These are not output through the DV Interface.  
If you connect w ith the i.LINK cable  
You cannot record the picture or the sound separately.  
Du b b in g a t a p e  
When connecting w ith the A/V connecting cable  
• Set DISPLAY in  
to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)  
• Press the following buttons to make the indicator disappear so that they will not be  
superimposed on the edited tape:  
On your camcorder:  
DISPLAY/ BATT INFO, DATA CODE  
On the Remote Commander:  
DISPLAY, DATA CODE, SEARCH MODE  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, and insert  
the recorded tape into your camcorder.  
(2) Prepare the VCR for recording. If your VCR has an input selector, set it to the  
input mode.  
Refer to the operating instructions of the VCR.  
(3) Play back the recorded tape on your camcorder.  
(4) Start recording on the VCR.  
Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.  
Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g t h e t a p e  
Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.  
If you record a paused playback picture  
• The recorded picture becomes rough with the DV Interface.  
• The picture may jitter when you play back the picture using other video equipment.  
79  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s  
– Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n a t a p e )  
You can duplicate selected scenes (programs) for editing onto another tape without  
operating the VCR.  
Scenes can be selected by frame. You can set up to 20 programs.  
Your camcorder can dub on a “Memory Stick.” See page 127 for details.  
Unwanted  
scene  
Unwanted  
scene  
Switch the order  
Be fo re o p e ra t in g Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g h a vin g t h e t a p e  
re co rd e d o n o t h e r e q u ip m e n t  
Step 1 Connecting to the VCR.  
Step 2 Setting the VCR for operation (p. 81).  
Step 3 Adjusting the synchronization of the VCR (p. 84).  
When you dub using the same VCR again, you can skip Step 2 and 3.  
Usin g Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g h a vin g t h e t a p e re co rd e d o n  
o t h e r e q u ip m e n t  
Operation 1 Making a program (p. 86).  
Operation 2 Performing the program (Dubbing on the tape) (p. 88).  
Note  
When editing digital video, the operation signals to the VCR cannot be sent with the  
LANC jack.  
St e p 1: Co n n e ct in g t o t h e VCR  
You can connect either the A/ V connecting cable or the i.LINK cable.  
Connect the devices as illustrated on page 78.  
80  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n a t a p e )  
St e p 2: Se t t in g t h e VCR fo r o p e ra t io n  
When connecting with the A/ V connecting cable, your camcorder sends the control  
signal by infrared rays to the remote sensor on the VCR.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Turn the power of the connected VCR on.  
If your VCR has an input selector, set it to the input mode. When you connect  
a video camera recorder, set its power switch to VCR/ VTR.  
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(3) Press MENU.  
(4) Select VIDEO EDIT in  
, then press EXEC.  
(5) Select TAPE, then press EXEC.  
(6) Press EDIT SET.  
(7) Select CONTROL, then press EXEC.  
(8) When connecting with the A/ V connecting cable, select IR, then press EXEC.  
When connecting with the i.LINK cable, select i.LINK, press EXEC, then go to  
“Step 3: Adjusting the synchronization of the VCR” on page 84.  
(9) Select IR SETUP, then press EXEC.  
(10) Select the IR SETUP code of your VCR, then press EXEC. Check the code in  
“About the IR SETUP code” (p. 83).  
4
7
5
9
6
EXIT  
END  
V I DEO ED IT  
0:32:30:14  
UNDO  
V I DEO ED I T  
ED I T SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
”CUT-IN”  
”CUT-OUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
OTHERS  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
IR  
MARK START ED I T  
IN  
COMMANDER  
DISPL AY  
SET  
VIDEO EDIT RETURN  
TAPE  
MEMORY  
TOTAL 0:00:00:00  
SCENE  
0
EXEC  
RET.  
END  
EXEC  
RET.  
END  
END  
V I DEO ED I T  
ED I T SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
”CUT-IN”  
V I DEO ED I T  
ED I T SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
”CUT-IN”  
IR  
i. LINK  
”CUT-OUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
”CUT-OUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
3
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
RET.  
(continued on the following page)  
81  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n a t a p e )  
(11) Select PAUSEMODE, then press EXEC.  
(12) Select the mode to cancel recording pause on the VCR, then press EXEC.  
The correct button depends on your VCR.  
Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.  
11  
12  
V I DEO ED I T  
END  
END  
V I DEO ED I T  
ED I T SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
”CUT-IN”  
ED I T SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
”CUT-IN”  
”CUT-OUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
”CUT-OUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
PAUSE  
REC  
PB  
PAUSE  
EXEC  
EXEC  
RET.  
RET.  
(13) Locate the infrared rays emitter of your camcorder and face it towards the  
remote sensor of the VCR about 30 cm (12 in.) apart.  
Do not put any obstacles between the both equipment.  
Infrared rays emitter  
VCR  
Remote sensor  
(14) Insert a recordable tape into the VCR, then set the VCR to recording  
pause.  
(15) Select IR TEST, then press EXEC.  
(16) Select EXECUTE, then press EXEC.  
If the VCR starts recording, the setting is correct.  
The indicator you selected to cancel recording pause on the VCR flashes  
on the screen. When finished, the indicator changes to COMPLETE.  
15  
16  
V I DEO ED I T  
END  
END  
V I DEO ED I T  
ED I T SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
”CUT-IN”  
ED I T SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
”CUT-IN”  
ENGAGE  
”CUT-OUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
REC PAUSE  
”CUT-OUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
RETURN  
EXECUTE  
COMPLETE  
EXEC RET.  
EXEC  
RET.  
82  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n a t a p e )  
When the VCR does not operate correctly  
• After checking the code in “About the IR SETUP code,” set the IR SETUP or the  
PAUSEMODE again.  
• Place your camcorder at least 30 cm (12 in.) away from the VCR.  
• Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.  
Note  
When you connect with the i.LINK cable, you may not be able to operate the dubbing  
function correctly, depending on the VCR.  
Set CONTROL to IR in the menu settings of your camcorder.  
Ab o u t t h e IR SETUP co d e  
The IR SETUP code is stored in the memory of your camcorder. Be sure to set the  
correct code, depending on your VCR. Default setting is code number 3.  
Brand  
IR SETUP code  
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6  
89  
Brand  
IR SETUP code  
22, 23, 24, 28, 29  
23, 32, 80  
21, 33, 35  
77, 78  
Sony  
Mitsubishi/ MGA  
Multitech  
NEC  
Admiral (M. Wards)  
Aiwa  
47, 54, 80  
49, 51  
Akai  
Olympic  
Optimus  
Orion  
Audio Dynamic  
21, 35  
22  
Bell&Howell  
(M. Wards)  
36  
60  
Panasonic  
Pentax  
16, 17, 77, 78  
8, 42  
Broksonic  
Canon  
21, 70, 82  
77, 78  
Philco  
26, 70, 77, 78  
47, 77, 78, 83  
78  
Citizen  
47  
Philips  
Craig  
47, 73  
Pioneer  
Curtis Mathis  
Daewoo  
DBX  
8, 77, 80  
Quasar  
6, 16, 17, 77, 78  
26, 40, 77  
RCA/ PROSCAN  
7, 8, 16, 40, 41, 42, 77, 78, 78*,  
83, 101  
21, 33, 35  
Dimensia  
Emerson  
Fisher  
8
Realistic  
Sansui  
22, 36, 37, 77, 80, 88  
26, 48, 59, 70, 80, 81, 82  
21  
36, 37, 44, 45  
Singer  
73  
Funai  
80  
Samsung  
Sanyo  
24, 24*, 32, 32*, 41, 94, 94*  
General Electric  
Goldstar/ LG  
GO VIDEO  
Hitachi  
8, 32*, 77, 94*, 101  
26, 36, 37, 47  
47  
Scott  
22, 23, 24, 28, 32, 37, 40, 41  
71  
Sharp  
88, 89  
8, 42, 78  
Shintom  
Signature 2000  
Sylvania  
Symphonic  
Tashiro  
Tatung  
Teac  
73  
HQ  
40  
80, 89  
Instant Replay  
JC Penny  
JVC  
77, 78  
77, 78, 80, 83  
80  
8, 21, 33, 35, 36, 42, 77  
12, 13, 14, 21, 33, 35  
21, 33, 35, 47  
36, 37, 42, 44, 45, 47, 49, 80  
17, 77, 78, 83  
21, 33, 35  
47  
Kenwood  
LXI (Sears)  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
Marta  
21, 33, 35  
21, 33, 35, 80  
77, 78  
Technics  
Toshiba  
Wards  
7, 40, 49  
37, 47, 88, 89, 95  
21, 33, 35, 36  
95  
47  
Memorex  
37, 77  
Yamaha  
Zenith  
Minolta  
8, 42  
* TV/ VCR component  
Note on the IR SETUP code  
Digital program editing is not possible if the VCR does not support IR SETUP codes.  
83  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n a t a p e )  
St e p 3: Ad ju st in g t h e syn ch ro n iza t io n o f t h e VCR  
You can adjust the synchronization of your camcorder and the VCR.  
Prepare a pen and paper for notes.  
Before operation, eject the cassette from your camcorder (if inserted).  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Insert a recordable cassette into the VCR, then set the VCR to recording  
pause.  
When you select i.LINK in CONTROL, recording pause is not necessary.  
(2) Select ADJ TEST, then press EXEC.  
(3) Select EXECUTE, then press EXEC.  
IN and OUT are recorded on an image for five times each to calculate the  
number values for adjusting the synchronization.  
The EXECUTING indicator flashes on the screen. When finished, the  
indicator changes to COMPLETE.  
(4) Rewind the tape in the VCR, then start slow playback.  
Five opening number of each IN, and closing number of each OUT appear.  
Take a note of the opening number value of each IN and the closing number  
value of each OUT.  
(5) Calculate the average of five opening number values of IN, and the average  
of five closing number values of each OUT.  
(6) Select ”CUT-IN”, then press EXEC.  
(7) Select the average number value of IN, then press EXEC.  
The calculated start position for recording is set.  
(8) Select ”CUT-OUT”, then press EXEC.  
(9) Select the average number value of OUT, then press EXEC.  
The calculated stop position for recording is set.  
(10) Press  
RET. to execute.  
84  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n a t a p e )  
2
6
3
8
END  
END  
V I DEO ED I T  
ED I T SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
”CUT-IN”  
”CUT-OUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
V I DEO ED I T  
ED I T SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
”CUT-IN”  
”CUT-OUT”  
IR SETUP  
COMPLETE  
RETURN  
EXECUTE  
ENGAGE  
PAUSEMODE REC PAUSE  
IR TEST  
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
RET.  
END  
V I DEO ED I T  
ED I T SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
”CUT-IN”  
”CUT-OUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
END  
V I DEO ED I T  
ED I T SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
”CUT-IN”  
”CUT-OUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
0
0
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
RET.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press  
END to return to PAGE1, then press EXIT.  
Notes  
• When you complete “Step 3 : Adjusting the synchronization of the VCR,” the image  
used to adjust the synchronization is recorded for about 50 seconds.  
• If you start recording from the very beginning of the tape, the first few seconds of the  
tape may not be recorded properly. Be sure to allow about 10 seconds’ lead before  
starting recording.  
• When the recording unit cannot be operated properly with the i.LINK cable, leave the  
connection as it is, and make the A/ V connecting cable settings (p. 81). Video and  
audio are sent by digital signals.  
85  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n a t a p e )  
Op e ra t io n 1: Ma kin g a Pro g ra m  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Insert the cassette for playback into your camcorder, and insert a cassette for  
recording into the VCR.  
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(3) Press MENU.  
(4) Select VIDEO EDIT in  
, then press EXEC.  
(5) Select TAPE, then press EXEC.  
(6) Search for the beginning of the first scene you want to insert using the video  
control buttons on the screen, then pause playback. You can fine-adjust one  
frame at a time with  
/
.
(7) Press MARK IN on the screen or MARK on the Remote Commander.  
The IN point of the first program is set, and the upper part of the program  
mark changes to light blue.  
(8) Search for the end of the first scene you want to insert using the video control  
buttons on the screen, then pause playback. You can fine-adjust one frame at  
a time with  
/
.
(9) Press MARK OUT on the screen or MARK on the Remote Commander.  
The OUT point of the first program is set, then the lower part of the program  
mark changes to light blue.  
(10) Repeat Step 6 to 9.  
You can set up to 20 programs in maximum.  
4
9
5
7
EXIT  
V I DEO ED IT  
V I DEO ED IT  
0:32:30:14  
UNDO  
0:08:55:06  
ED I T  
UNDO  
OTHERS  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
MARK START ED I T  
IN  
MARK START  
OUT  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
SET  
SET  
VIDEO EDIT RETURN  
TAPE  
TOTAL 0:00:00:00  
TOTAL 0:00:00:00  
MEMORY  
SCENE  
0
SCENE  
0
END  
END  
EXEC  
RET.  
10  
V I DEO ED I T  
V I DEO ED IT  
0:09:07:06  
UNDO  
0:10:01:23  
ED I T  
SET  
UNDO  
ED I T  
SET  
MARK START  
I N  
MARK START  
I N  
TOTAL 0:00:13:00  
TOTAL 0:00:47:12  
SCENE  
1
SCENE  
3
END  
END  
To fin ish m a kin g p ro g ra m s  
Press  
END.  
The program is stored in memory until the tape is ejected.  
86  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n a t a p e )  
Note  
You cannot operate recording during Digital program editing.  
On a blank portion of the tape  
You cannot set IN or OUT.  
If there is a blank portion betw een the IN point and the OUT point on the tape  
The total time may not be displayed correctly.  
Era sin g t h e p ro g ra m yo u h a ve se t  
Erase OUT mark first, and then IN mark of the last set program.  
(1) Press UNDO.  
(2) Press ERASE 1 MARK. The last set program mark flashes, then the DELETE ?  
indicator appears.  
(3) Press EXEC. The last set program is deleted.  
To cancel erasing  
Press CANCEL in Step 3.  
Era sin g a ll p ro g ra m s  
(1) Follow Step 2 to 5 on page 86.  
(2) Press UNDO.  
(3) Press ERASE ALL. All the set program marks flash, then the DELETE ?  
indicator appears.  
(4) Press EXEC. All the set programs are deleted.  
To cancel erasing all programs  
Press CANCEL in Step 4.  
87  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n a t a p e )  
Op e ra t io n 2: Pe rfo rm in g t h e p ro g ra m (Du b b in g o n t h e t a p e )  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) When you use a digital video camera recorder, set its power switch to VCR/  
VTR.  
(2) Make sure your camcorder and the VCR are connected, and that the VCR is set  
to recording pause.  
When you use the i.LINK cable, this procedure is not necessary.  
(3) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(4) Press MENU.  
(5) Select VIDEO EDIT in  
, then press EXEC.  
(6) Select TAPE, then press EXEC.  
(7) Press START.  
(8) Press EXEC.  
Your camcorder searches for the beginning of the first program, then dubbing  
starts.  
The program mark flashes.  
The SEARCH indicator appears during search, and the EDITING indicator  
appears during edit on the screen.  
When dubbing ends, your camcorder and the VCR automatically stop.  
To ca n ce l d u b b in g d u rin g e d it  
Press CANCEL.  
To e n d Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g  
Your camcorder stops when dubbing is complete. Then the display returns to VIDEO  
EDIT in the menu settings.  
Press  
END to end the video edit function.  
When the program has not been set  
You cannot press START.  
You cannot record on the VCR in the follow ing  
Indicator  
Cause  
No indicator  
• The write-protect tab on the cassette is set to lock.  
• The IR SETUP code is not correct. (When IR is  
selected.)  
• The button to cancel recording pause is not  
correct. (When IR is selected.)  
CHECK ”i.LINK” & REC STATUS • i.LINK is selected but the i.LINK cable is not  
connected.  
• The power of the connected VCR is not turned  
on. (When i.LINK is selected.)  
88  
Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s  
You can record a tape from another VCR or a TV program from a TV that has video/  
audio outputs. Use your camcorder as a recorder. You can connect either the A/ V  
connecting cable (supplied) or i.LINK cable (optional).  
If you connect with the i.LINK cable (optional), video and audio signals are transmitted  
in digital form for high-quality editing.  
Co n n e ct in g t o t h e VCR o r t h e TV  
Co n n e ct in g w it h t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le  
S VIDEO  
AUDIO/  
VIDEO  
TV  
Yellow  
OUT  
White  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)  
VCR  
Red  
: Signal flow  
Co n n e ct in g w it h t h e i.LINK ca b le  
DV  
Interface  
i.LINK  
i.LINK cable (optional)  
: Signal flow  
89  
Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s  
If your VCR is a monaural type  
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video input jack and the  
white or the red plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or the TV. When the white  
plug is connected, the left channel audio is output, and when the red plug is connected,  
the right channel audio is output.  
If your VCR has an S video jack  
See page 45 for details.  
When using the i.LINK cable  
• Before recording, make sure if the DV IN indicator appears on the screen. The DV IN  
indicator may appear on both equipment.  
• You cannot record the picture or the sound separately.  
Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s  
When connecting w ith the A/V connecting cable  
Set DISPLAY in  
to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into your camcorder. If  
you are recording from the tape on the VCR, insert the recorded tape into the  
VCR.  
(2) Set your camcorder to recording pause.  
1 Press FN and select PAGE3.  
2 Press REC CTRL.  
3 Press REC PAUSE.  
REC CTRL  
RET.  
REC  
PAUSE  
REC  
START  
(3) Press N on the VCR to start playback if you record from the tape on the VCR.  
Select a TV program if you record from a TV. The picture from the playback  
side appears on the screen.  
(4) Press REC START at the scene where you want to start recording from.  
Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g t h e t a p e  
Press  
on your camcorder, and then press the stop button on the VCR.  
Usin g t h e Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r  
In Step 2, press z REC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press X. In Step  
4, press X at the scene where you want to start recording from.  
Note on the Remote Commander  
Your camcorder works in the commander mode VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3  
are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid erroneous  
remote control operation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR 2,  
we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with  
black paper.  
90  
In se rt in g a sce n e fro m a VCR  
– In se rt e d it in g  
You can insert a new scene with sound from a VCR onto your originally recorded tape  
by specifying the insert start and end points. Use the Remote Commander for this  
operation.  
Connections are the same as on page 89. Insert the cassette containing the desired scene  
to insert into the VCR.  
[a ]  
[A]  
[b ]  
[c]  
[B]  
[C]  
[A] The tape that contains the scene to be inserted  
[B] The tape before editing  
[C] The tape after editing  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) On the VCR, locate just before the insert start point [a ], then set the VCR to  
playback pause.  
(2) On your camcorder, locate the insert end point [c], then set it to playback  
pause.  
(3) Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander. The ZERO SET  
MEMORY indicator flashes and the end point of the insert is stored in memory.  
The tape counter shows “0:00:00”.  
(4) On your camcorder, locate the insert start point [b ] and set your camcorder to  
recording pause.  
1 Press FN and select PAGE3.  
2 Press REC CTRL.  
3 Press REC PAUSE.  
(5) First press X on the VCR, and after a few seconds press REC START on your  
camcorder to start inserting the new scene with sound.  
Inserting automatically stops near the zero point on the tape counter. Your  
camcorder automatically stops recording and the zero point set with ZERO  
SET MEMORY is cleared from memory.  
91  
In se rt in g a sce n e fro m a VCR – In se rt e d it in g  
0:00:00  
3
ZERO SET  
MEMORY  
ZERO SET  
MEMORY  
To ch a n g e t h e in se rt e n d p o in t  
Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander again after Step 4 to erase the  
ZERO SET MEMORY indicator and begin from Step 2.  
Usin g t h e Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r  
In Step 4, press z REC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press X. In Step  
5, press X at the scene where you want to start recording from.  
To insert a scene w ithout setting the insert end point  
Skip Step 2 and 3. Press x on the Remote Commander or  
on your camcorder  
when you want to stop inserting.  
92  
Au d io d u b b in g  
You can record additional audio to the original sound on the tape by connecting audio  
equipment or a microphone. If you connect the audio equipment, you can add sound to  
your tape already recorded in the 12-bit mode by specifying start and end points. The  
original sound will not be erased.  
You cannot dub audio in the follow ing cases:  
• The tape recorded in the 16-bit mode  
• The tape recorded in the LP mode  
• Connecting with the DV Interface  
• The blank portions of the tape  
• When the write-protect tab of the cassette is set to lock.  
Pre p a rin g fo r a u d io d u b b in g  
You can record additional audio in the following:  
• Dubbing with the built-in microphone  
• Connecting the microphone (optional) to the MIC jack  
• Connecting the microphone (optional) to the intelligent accessory shoe  
• Connecting the A/ V connecting cable to the AUDIO/ VIDEO jack  
The audio input to be recorded takes precedence over others in the following order:  
• MIC jack  
• Intelligent accessory shoe  
• AUDIO/ VIDEO jack  
• Built-in microphone  
Du b b in g w it h t h e b u ilt -in m icro p h o n e  
No connection is necessary.  
Co n n e ct in g t h e m icro p h o n e (o p t io n a l) t o t h e MIC ja ck  
MIC (PLUG IN  
POWER) jack  
Microphone (optional)  
: Signal flow  
You can check the recorded picture and sound by connecting the AUDIO/ VIDEO jack  
to a TV.  
The recorded sound is not output from a speaker. Check the sound by using the  
headphones or a TV.  
93  
Au d io d u b b in g  
Co n n e ct in g t h e m icro p h o n e (o p t io n a l) t o t h e in t e llig e n t  
a cce sso ry sh o e  
Slide the shoe cover to remove it. Then, connect the external microphone (optional) to  
the intelligent accessory shoe.  
Intelligent  
accessory  
shoe  
Shoe cover  
Microphone (optional)  
Co n n e ct in g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le t o t h e AUDIO/VIDEO ja ck  
Audio equipment  
AUDIO/  
VIDEO  
LINE OUT  
L
R
AUDIO L  
AUDIO R  
White  
Red  
Do not connect the  
video (yellow) plug.  
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)  
: Signal flow  
Note  
When dubbing with the AUDIO/ VIDEO jack or the built-in microphone, pictures are  
not output through the S VIDEO jack or AUDIO/ VIDEO jack. Check the recorded  
picture on the screen. You can check the recorded sound by using headphones.  
94  
Au d io d u b b in g  
Ad d in g a u d io o n t h e re co rd e d t a p e  
Choose a connection mentioned on pages 93, 94, and connect the audio equipment or  
the microphone to your camcorder. Then follow the procedure below using the touch  
panel or the Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder.  
Usin g t h e t o u ch p a n e l  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
Operate by touching the panel.  
(1) Insert the recorded tape into your camcorder.  
(2) Locate the recording start point. Press to start playing back. To pause  
at the recording start point. You can fine adjust the  
playing back, press  
recording start point by pressing  
(3) Press FN and select PAGE3.  
(4) Press A DUB CTRL.  
/
on the Remote Commander.  
The A DUB CTRL screen appears.  
A DUB CTRL  
RET.  
N
X
AUDIO  
DUB  
(5) Press AUDIO DUB. The green  
X indicator appears on the screen.  
(6) Press  
audio you want to record.  
The new sound is recorded in stereo 2 (ST2) during playback. While recording  
new sound, the red indicator appears on the screen.  
(7) Press on your camcorder at the point where you want to stop recording.  
on your camcorder and at the same time start playing back the  
Usin g t h e Re m o t e co m m a n d e r  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
(1) Follow Step 1 and 2 in “Using the touch panel.”  
(2) Press AUDIO DUB on the Remote Commander.  
The green  
X indicator appears on the screen.  
(3) Press X on the Remote Commander and at the same time start playing back  
the audio you want to record.  
The new sound is recorded in stereo 2 (ST2) during playback. While recording  
new sound, the red  
indicator appears on the screen.  
(4) Press x on the Remote Commander at the point where you want to stop  
recording.  
95  
Au d io d u b b in g  
N
x
X
AUDIO DUB  
To add new sound more precisely  
Press ZERO SET MEMORY at the point where you want to stop recording later during  
playback.  
Follow Step 2 in “Using the touch panel” on page 95. Recording automatically stops at  
the point where ZERO SET MEMORY was pressed.  
We recommend that you add new sound on the tape recorded w ith your  
camcorder  
If you add new sound on the tape recorded with another camcorder (including another  
DCR-TRV60/ TRV70), the sound quality may become worse.  
Mo n it o rin g t h e n e w re co rd e d so u n d  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Play back the tape on which you added audio.  
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(3) Press MENU.  
(4) Select AUDIO MIX in  
, then press EXEC.  
EXIT  
VCR SET  
H i F i SOUND  
AUDIO MIX  
A
/
VcDV OUTST1  
ST2  
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
(5) Press r/ R to adjust the balance between the original sound (ST1) and the new  
sound (ST2), then press EXEC.  
About five minutes after you disconnect the power source or remove the  
battery pack, the setting of AUDIO MIX returns to the original sound (ST1)  
only. The default setting is original sound only.  
96  
Su p e rim p o sin g a t it le o n a ca sse t t e w it h  
Ca sse t t e Me m o ry  
VACATION  
One cassette can have up to about 20 titles, with each title comprising five characters.  
However, if Cassette Memory is full with date and cassette label data, one cassette can  
have only up to about 11 titles each comprising five characters.  
Cassette Memory capacity is as follows:  
– Six date data (maximum)  
– One cassette label (maximum)  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
or  
.
(1) Insert a cassette with Cassette Memory.  
(2) During standby, recording, playback or playback pause, press FN to display  
PAGE1.  
(3) Press MENU.  
(4) Select TITLE in  
, then press EXEC.  
(5) Select , then press EXEC.  
(6) Select a desired title, then press EXEC. The title appears on the screen.  
(7) If necessary, change the color, size, or position by pressing COLOR, SIZE,  
POS r or POS R.  
(8) Press TITLE OK.  
(9) Press SAVE TITLE.  
During playback, playback pause or recording:  
The TITLE SAVE indicator is displayed on the screen for about five seconds  
and the title is set.  
During recording standby:  
The TITLE indicator appears. And when you press START/ STOP to start  
recording, the TITLE SAVE indicator is displayed on the screen for about five  
seconds and the title is set.  
5
6
EXIT  
PRESET TITLE  
HELLO!  
TITLE  
OK  
RET.  
EXIT  
HAPPY BIRTHDAY  
HAPPY HOLIDAYS  
CONGRATULATIONS!  
OUR SWEET BABY  
WEDDING  
VACATION  
THE END  
VACATION  
COLOR  
SIZE  
POS r POS R  
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
To use the custom title  
If you want to use the custom title, select  
in Step 5.  
97  
Su p e rim p o sin g a t it le o n a ca sse t t e w it h Ca sse t t e Me m o ry  
The titles superimposed w ith your camcorder  
• They are displayed only by the DV  
format video equipment with the index titler  
function.  
• The point you superimposed the title may be detected as an index signal when  
searching a recording with another video equipment.  
To not display title  
Set TITLE DSPL in  
to OFF in the menu settings (p. 178).  
Title setting  
• The title color changes as follows:  
WHITE t YELLOW t VIOLET t RED t CYAN t GREEN t BLUE  
• The title size changes as follows:  
SMALL y LARGE  
You cannot input 13 characters or more in LARGE size.  
• The title position changes as follows:  
If you select the title size SMALL, you have nine choices for the title position.  
If you select the title size LARGE, you have eight choices for the title position.  
Era sin g a t it le  
The POWER switch should be set to  
or  
.
Operate by touching the panel.  
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU.  
(3) Select TITLEERASE in  
, then press EXEC. The TITLE ERASE screen  
appears.  
(4) Select the title you want to erase, then press EXEC.  
The ERASE OK? indicator appears.  
(5) Make sure the title is the one you want to erase, then press OK.  
The ERASING indicator flashes on the screen.  
When the title is erased, the COMPLETE indicator appears.  
3
4
T I TLE ERASE  
T I TLE ERASE  
PRESENT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
HELLO!  
4
CONGRATULATIONS!  
HAPPY NEW YEAR!  
PRESENT  
ERASE OK?  
GOOD MORNING  
WEDDING  
OK  
CAN–  
CEL  
r
R
EXEC  
END  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l e ra sin g  
Press CANCEL in Step 5.  
98  
Ma kin g yo u r o w n t it le s  
You can make up to two titles and store them in the memory of your camcorder. Each  
title can have up to 20 characters.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
or  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU.  
(3) Select TITLE in  
, then press EXEC.  
(4) Select , then press EXEC.  
(5) Select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET, then press EXEC.  
(6) Select a desired character. Repeat pressing a key to select a desired character  
on the key.  
(7) Press c to move for the next character. Repeat the same procedure as Step 6  
and 7 to complete your title.  
(8) Press SET. The title is stored in memory.  
4
5
7
EXIT  
EXIT  
EXIT  
TITLE SET  
[
TITLE SET  
______________  
TITLE SET  
CUSTOM1 SET  
CUSTOM2 SET  
____________________  
]
[
]
PARTY  
&?!  
ABC  
DEF  
T
t
&?!  
ABC  
DEF  
T
t
GH I  
J
KL  
MNO  
123 678  
GH I  
JKL  
MNO  
123 678  
45  
90  
45  
90  
PQR  
S
TUV  
WXY  
Z
’ . ,  
SET  
PQR  
S
TUV  
WXY  
Z
’ . ,  
/–  
SET  
/
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ch a n g e a t it le yo u h a ve st o re d  
In Step 5, select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET, depending on which title you want  
to change, then press EXEC and enter a new title as desired.  
If you take five minutes or longer to enter characters during tape recording  
standby w ith the cassette inserted in your camcorder  
The power automatically goes off. The characters you have entered remain stored in  
memory. Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) once and then to CAMERA again, then  
start again from Step 1.  
We recommend setting the POWER switch to VCR or removing the cassette so that  
your camcorder does not automatically turn off while you are entering title characters.  
To erase the character  
Press C. The last character is erased.  
To enter a space  
Press c.  
99  
La b e lin g a ca sse t t e w it h Ca sse t t e Me m o ry  
The label can consist of up to 10 characters and is stored in Cassette Memory. When you  
insert the labeled cassette and set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR, the label is  
displayed for about five seconds.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
or  
.
(1) Insert a cassette with Cassette Memory you want to label.  
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(3) Press MENU.  
(4) Select TAPE TITLE in  
, then press EXEC.  
(5) Select a desired character. Repeat pressing a key to select a desired character  
on the key.  
(6) Press c to move for the next character. Repeat the same procedure as Step 5  
and 6 to complete the label.  
(7) Press SET. The label is stored in memory.  
4
5
6
EXIT  
EXIT  
EXIT  
TAPE TITLE  
_________  
TAPE TITLE  
TAPE TITLE  
[
]
[
____  
GRADU  
]
G
[
__________  
]
&?!  
ABC  
DEF  
T
t
&?!  
GH I  
ABC  
DEF  
T
t
&?!  
GH I  
ABC  
DEF  
T
t
GH I  
J
KL  
MNO  
123 678  
J
KL  
MNO  
123 678  
JKL  
MNO  
123 678  
45  
90  
45  
90  
45  
90  
PQR  
S
TUV  
WXY  
Z
’ . ,  
SET  
PQR  
S
TUV  
WXY  
Z
’ . ,  
/–  
SET  
PQR  
S
TUV  
WXY  
Z
’ . ,  
SET  
/
/
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To e ra se t h e la b e l yo u h a ve m a d e  
Select C in Step 5 to erase the label, then press SET.  
To ch a n g e t h e la b e l yo u h a ve m a d e  
Insert the cassette for which you want to change the label, and operate in the same way  
to make a new label.  
If you have superimposed titles in the cassette  
When the label appears, up to four titles also appear.  
To erase the character  
Press C. The last character is erased.  
To enter a space  
Press c.  
100  
Era sin g a ll t h e d a t a in Ca sse t t e Me m o ry  
The following data saved in Cassette Memory can be completely erased at once:  
– Date data  
– Title data  
– Cassette label  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
or  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU.  
(3) Select ERASE ALL in  
, then press EXEC.  
(4) Select OK, then press EXEC.  
The OK indicator changes to EXECUTE.  
(5) Select EXECUTE, then press EXEC. The ERASING indicator flashes on the  
screen. When erasing is complete, the COMPLETE indicator appears.  
3
4
EXIT  
EXIT  
CM SET  
TITLE  
CM SET  
TITLE  
TITLEERASE  
TITLE DSPL  
CM SEARCH  
TAPE TITLE  
ERASE ALL  
TITLEERASE  
TITLE DSPL  
CM SEARCH  
TAPE TITLE  
ERASE ALL  
RETURN  
OK  
RETURN  
EXECUTE  
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
RET.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l e ra sin g  
Select RETURN in Step 5, then press EXEC.  
101  
— “ Me m o ry St ick” Op e ra t io n s —  
Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
The “Memory Stick” is a new light and small recording media which, despite of the  
size, can store greater data than a floppy disk.  
In addition to exchanging data between “Memory Stick” compatible equipment, you  
can also use a “Memory Stick” to store data as a type of detachable external recording  
media.  
There are two types of “Memory Stick”: an ordinary “Memory Stick” and a “MagicGate  
1)  
Memory Stick” that is equipped with the MagicGate* copyright protection technology.  
You can use both types of “Memory Stick” with your camcorder. However, because  
your camcorder does not support the MagicGate standards, data recorded with your  
camcorder is not subject to MagicGate copyright protection.  
In addition, you can also use “Memory Stick Duo” or “Memory Stick PRO” with your  
camcorder.  
All “Memory Stick” media operations are not necessarily guaranteed.  
1)  
* MagicGate is copyright protection technology that uses encryption technology.  
File fo rm a t  
Still image (JPEG)  
Your camcorder compresses and records image data in the JPEG (Joint Photographic  
Experts Group) format. The file extension is .JPG.  
2)  
Exif * ver.2.2 JPEG compliant, DPOF compatible.  
2)  
* Exif: Exif is a file format for still images, established by the Japan Electronics and  
Information Technology Industries Association(JEITA). Files in this format can  
have additional information such as your camcorders setting information at the  
time of recording.  
Moving picture (MPEG)  
Your camcorder compresses and records picture data in the MPEG (Moving Picture  
Experts Group) format. The file extension is .MPG.  
Typical image data file name  
Still image  
101-0001:  
This file name appears on the screen of your camcorder.  
DSC00001.JPG: This file name appears on the display of a computer.  
Moving picture  
MOV00001:  
This file name appears on the screen of your camcorder.  
MOV00001.MPG: This file name appears on the display of a computer.  
To p re ve n t fro m e ra sin g im a g e s a ccid e n t a lly  
Rear part of the “Memory Stick”  
Slide the write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” to LOCK.  
The position and shape of the write-protect tab may be different depending on the  
model. A certain model doesn't have a write-protect tab on it.  
Write-protect tab  
Terminal  
No t e s o n t h e “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Labeling position  
Affix its label on the labeling position.  
Be sure not to affix any labels other than the dedicated one on the “Memory  
Stick.”  
Labeling position  
102  
Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
Image data may be damaged in the follow ing cases. We cannot compensate for  
the damaged image data.  
– If you eject the “Memory Stick,” turn the power off on your camcorder or remove  
the battery pack for replacement while your camcorder is reading or writing image  
files on the “Memory Stick” (while the access lamp is lit or flashing).  
– If you use the “Memory Stick” near magnets or magnetic fields such as those of  
speakers and a TV.  
We recommend backing up important data on the hard disk of a computer.  
On handling  
• When you carry or store the “Memory Stick,” put it in its case.  
• Prevent metallic objects or your finger from coming into contact with the metal parts  
of the connecting section.  
• Do not bend, drop or apply strong shock to the “Memory Stick.”  
• Do not disassemble or modify the “Memory Stick.”  
• Do not let the “Memory Stick” get wet.  
On location for use  
Do not use or keep the “Memory Stick” in locations that are:  
– Extremely hot such as in a car parked in the sun or under the scorching sun  
– Under direct sunlight  
– Very humid or subject to corrosive gases  
Notes on using the “Memory Stick Duo” (optional)  
• Be sure to insert the “Memory Stick Duo” into the “Memory Stick Duo” Adaptor  
when using the “Memory Stick Duo” with your camcorder.  
• Make sure you insert the “Memory Stick Duo” in the proper direction. Inserting it the  
wrong way may cause a malfunction.  
• Do not insert the “Memory Stick Duo” not inserted into the “Memory Stick Duo”  
Adapter into the “Memory Stick”-compatible unit. This may cause a malfunction of  
the unit.  
Note on using the “Memory Stick PRO” (optional)  
The “Memory Stick PRO” with a capacity up to 1 GB can be used with this camcorder.  
Th e Me m o ry St ick” fo rm a t t e d b y a co m p u t e r  
The “Memory Stick” formatted by Windows OS or Macintosh computers do not have a  
guaranteed compatibility with your camcorder.  
No t e s o n im a g e d a t a co m p a t ib ilit y  
• Image data files recorded on the “Memory Stick” by your camcorder conform with the  
Design Rule for Camera File Systems universal standard established by the JEITA  
(Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association).  
On your camcorder, you cannot play back still images recorded on other equipment  
(DCR-TRV890E/ TRV900/ TRV900E or DSC-D700/ D770) that does not conform to this  
universal standard. (These models are not sold in some areas.)  
• If you cannot use the “Memory Stick” that is used with other equipment, format it  
with your camcorder (p. 177). Note that formatting erases all information on the  
“Memory Stick.”  
• You may not be able to play back images recorded on your camcorder depending on  
the equipment you attempt to use for playback.  
• You may not be able to play back images with your camcorder:  
– When playing back image data modified on your computer.  
– When playing back image data shot with other equipment.  
103  
Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
• The “Memory Stick”,  
Corporation.  
and “MagicGate Memory Stick” are trademarks of Sony  
• “Memory Stick Duo” and  
are trademarks of Sony Corporation.  
are trademarks of Sony Corporation.  
are trademarks of Sony Corporation.  
• “Memory Stick PRO” and  
• “MagicGate” and  
• All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered  
trademarks of their respective companies.  
Furthermore, “™” and “®” are not mentioned in each case in this manual.  
In se rt in g a “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Insert a “Memory Stick” in the “Memory Stick” slot as far as it can go with the b mark  
facing out as illustrated.  
Access lamp  
Eje ct in g a “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Press a “Memory Stick” once lightly.  
Notes  
• If you insert a “Memory Stick” forcibly in the opposite direction, the “Memory Stick”  
slot may be damaged.  
• Do not insert anything other than a “Memory Stick” into the “Memory Stick” slot.  
This may cause a malfunction.  
While the access lamp is lit or flashing  
Do not shake or knock your camcorder because your camcorder is reading the data  
from the “Memory Stick” or writing the data on the “Memory Stick.” Do not turn the  
power off, eject the “Memory Stick” or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, image data  
may become damaged.  
If “  
MEMORY STICK ERRORappears  
Reinsert the “Memory Stick” a few times. The “Memory Stick” may be damaged if the  
indicator still appears. If this occurs, use another “Memory Stick.”  
104  
Se le ct in g t h e q u a lit y a n d size o f im a g e  
d a t a  
Se le ct in g t h e st ill im a g e q u a lit y  
The default setting is FINE.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
or  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU.  
(3) Select STILL SET in  
, then press EXEC.  
(4) Select QUALITY, then press EXEC.  
(5) Select a desired image quality, then press EXEC.  
3
4
EXIT  
EXIT  
MEM SET  
1
MEM SET  
1
STILL SET  
BURST  
STILL SET  
BURST  
OFF  
QUALITY  
IMAGESIZE  
QUALITY  
FINE  
IMAGESIZE STANDARD  
REMAIN  
8
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
RET.  
Setting  
FINE (FINE)  
Meaning  
Use this mode when you want to record high quality  
images. Fine images are compressed to about 1/ 4.  
STANDARD (STD) This is the standard image quality. Standard images are  
compressed to about 1/ 10.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
105  
Se le ct in g t h e q u a lit y a n d size o f im a g e d a t a  
Se le ct in g t h e st ill im a g e size  
You can select image size 1600 × 1200 or 640 × 480. (When the POWER switch is set to  
CAMERA or VCR, the image size is automatically set to 640 × 480.)  
The default setting is 1600 × 1200.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU.  
(3) Select STILL SET in  
, then press EXEC.  
(4) Select IMAGESIZE, then press EXEC.  
(5) Select a desired image size, then press EXEC.  
The indicator changes as follow:  
1600  
640  
3
4
MEM SET  
STILL SET  
BURST  
QUALITY  
IMAGESIZE  
1
EXIT  
MEM SET  
1
1600  
EXIT  
STILL SET  
BURST  
OFF  
QUALITY  
IMAGESIZE 1600 × 1200  
640 × 480  
REMA I N  
8
r
R
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
RET.  
Me m o ry ca p a cit y o f st ill im a g e s  
Recorded images are compressed in the JPEG format before being stored in memory.  
The memory capacity allotted to each still image varies depending on the selected  
image quality and image size. Details are shown in the table below.  
1600 × 1200 image size  
Image quality  
FINE  
Memory capacity  
About 960 KB  
About 420 KB  
STANDARD  
640 × 480 image size  
Image quality  
FINE  
Memory capacity  
About 150 KB  
About 60 KB  
STANDARD  
106  
Se le ct in g t h e q u a lit y a n d size o f im a g e d a t a  
Se le ct in g t h e m o vin g p ict u re size  
You can select picture size 320 × 240 or 160 × 112.  
The default setting is 320 × 240.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
or  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU.  
(3) Select MOVIE SET in  
, then press EXEC.  
(4) Select IMAGESIZE, then press EXEC.  
(5) Select a desired image size, then press EXEC.  
The indicator changes as follows:  
320  
160  
3
4
EXIT  
MEM SET  
1
MEM SET  
1
EXIT  
320  
MOVIE SET  
MOVIE SET  
IMAGESIZE 320 240  
REMAIN  
IMAGESIZE 320 240  
REMAIN 160 112  
REMAIN  
REMAIN  
30sec  
30sec  
r
R
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
RET.  
107  
Se le ct in g t h e q u a lit y a n d size o f im a g e d a t a  
Ap p ro xim a t e n u m b e r o f st ill im a g e s a n d t im e o f m o vin g p ict u re s  
yo u ca n re co rd o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”  
The number of still images and time of moving pictures you can record vary depending  
on which image quality and image size you select and the complexity of the subject.  
St ill im a g e s  
(Unit: Image)  
FINE  
STANDARD  
Type of the  
“Memory Stick”  
1600 × 1200  
640 × 480  
1600 × 1200  
640 × 480  
1600  
8
640  
50  
1600  
18  
640  
120  
8 MB (supplied)  
16 MB  
16  
96  
37  
240  
32 MB  
32  
190  
75  
485  
64 MB  
65  
390  
150  
300  
540  
1100  
2250  
980  
128 MB  
130  
235  
480  
980  
780  
1970  
3550  
7200  
14500  
256 MB (MSX-256)  
512 MB (MSX-512)  
1 GB (MSX-1G)  
1400  
2850  
5900  
Mo vin g p ict u re s  
Image size  
Type of the  
“Memory Stick”  
320 × 240  
160 × 112  
320  
1 min 20 s  
160  
8 MB (supplied)  
16 MB  
5 min 20 s  
10 min 40 s  
21 min 20 s  
42 min 40 s  
2 min 40 s  
32 MB  
5 min 20 s  
64 MB  
10 min 40 s  
21 min 20 s  
42 min 40 s  
1 h 25 min 20 s  
2 h 50 min 40 s  
128 MB  
1 h 25 min 20 s  
2 h 50 min 40 s  
5 h 41 min 20 s  
11 h 22 min 40 s  
256 MB (MSX-256)  
512 MB (MSX-512)  
1 GB (MSX-1G)  
The table shows approximate number of still images and time of moving pictures you  
can record on a “Memory Stick” formatted with your camcorder.  
108  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry  
St ick” – Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
(1) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly and check the image. The green z indicator  
stops flashing, then lights up. The brightness of the image and the focus are  
adjusted, being targeted for the middle of the image, and are fixed. Recording  
does not start yet.  
(2) Press PHOTO deeply.  
Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.  
The image displayed on the screen when you press PHOTO deeply is recorded  
on the “Memory Stick.”  
[a ]  
FINE  
1600  
/
8
1
2
PHOTO  
1 0 1  
[b ]  
FINE  
1600  
PHOTO  
1 0 1  
POWER sw itch  
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
[a ] Approximate number of images that can be recorded on the “Memory Stick” *  
[b ] Number of the folder currently used for recording  
* The indication of the number of recordable still images  
Depending on the image quality setting and the complexity of the subject, the indication  
of the remaining number of recordable still images may not change even after you  
record an image.  
When the remaining number is greater than 9999, the >9999 indicator appears on the  
screen.  
109  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
You can record still images on a “Memory Stick” during tape recording or tape  
recording standby  
See page 46 for details.  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY  
The following functions do not work:  
– Digital zoom  
– Super NightShot  
– Color Slow Shutter  
– Wide mode  
– Fader  
– Picture effect  
– Digital effect  
– SPORTS of PROGRAM AE (The indicator flashes.)  
– Title  
– SteadyShot  
While saving a still image data  
You cannot turn off the power or press PHOTO.  
When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander  
Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press  
the button.  
When you press PHOTO lightly in Step 1  
The image momentarily flickers. This is not a malfunction.  
Recording data  
The recording data (date/ time or various settings when recorded) is not displayed  
during recording. However, it is recorded automatically onto the “Memory Stick.” To  
display the recording data, press DATA CODE during playback. You can also use the  
Remote Commander for this operation (p. 40).  
If you record still images w hen the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY  
The angle of view is slightly larger compared with the angle of view when the POWER  
switch is set to CAMERA.  
110  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
Re co rd in g im a g e s co n t in u o u sly  
You can record still images continuously. Before recording, select one of the three  
modes described below in the menu settings.  
NORMAL [a ] (  
)
Your camcorder shoots up to four still images in 1600 × 1200 size or 25 still images in  
640 × 480 size at about 0.5 sec intervals.  
HIGH SPEED [a ] (  
)
Your camcorder shoots up to 32 still images in 640 × 480 size at about 0.07 sec intervals.  
EXP BRKTG [b ] (  
)
Your camcorder automatically shoots three images at about 0.5 sec intervals at different  
exposures.  
[a]  
[b]  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU.  
(3) Select STILL SET in  
, then press EXEC.  
(4) Select BURST, then press EXEC.  
MEM SET  
1
EXIT  
STILL SET  
BURST  
QUALITY  
OFF  
NORMAL  
IMAGESIZE HIGH SPEED  
EXP BRKTG  
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
(5) Select a desired mode, then press EXEC.  
(6) Press EXIT to make the menu display disappear.  
(7) Press PHOTO deeply.  
111  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
The number of still images in continuous shooting  
The number of still images you can shoot continuously varies depending on the image  
size and the capacity of the “Memory Stick.”  
While recording images continuously  
The flash does not work.  
When shooting w ith the self-timer or the Remote Commander  
Your camcorder automatically records up to the maximum number of still images.  
When HIGH SPEED is selected  
Flickering or changes in color may occur.  
If remaining capacity on the “Memory Stick” is less than for three images  
EXP BRKTG does not work. “  
FULL” appears when you press PHOTO.  
The effect of EXP BRKTG  
The effect of EXP BRKTG may not be noticeable on the screen.  
We recommend viewing images on the TV or the computer to check the effect.  
When NORMAL or HIGH SPEED is selected  
Recording continues up to the maximum number of still images while pressing PHOTO  
deeply.  
112  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
Re co rd in g im a g e s w it h t h e fla sh  
The POWER switch should be set to  
or  
.
If you press PHOTO, the flash automatically pops up to strobe. The default setting is  
auto (no indicator). To change the flash mode, press (flash) repeatedly until the flash  
mode indicator appears on the screen. You cannot use this function while recording  
moving pictures.  
(flash)  
Each press of (flash) changes the indicator as follows:  
t
t AUTO (No indicator)  
When you set RED EYE R in  
follows:  
to ON in the menu settings, the indicator changes as  
t
t
Forced flash:  
The flash fires regardless of the surrounding  
brightness.  
Auto red-eye reduction: The flash fires before recording to reduce the red-eye.  
Forced red-eye reduction: The flash fires before recording to reduce the red-eye  
regardless of the surrounding brightness.  
No flash:  
The flash does not fire.  
The flash is automatically adjusted to the appropriate brightness. You can also change  
FLASH LVL in to the desired brightness in the menu settings. Try recording various  
images to find the most appropriate setting for FLASH LVL.  
113  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
Notes  
• Remove dirt from the surface of the flash if it is dirty. If the surface of the flash is  
shaded or caked with dirt heated by strobing, the flash may not be able to give off a  
sufficient amount of light.  
• The recommended shooting distance using the built-in flash is 0.3 m to 2.5 m (31/ 32  
feet to 8 1/ 3 feet).  
• Attaching the lens hood (supplied) or a conversion lens (optional) may cause their  
shadow to appear.  
• You cannot use an external flash (optional) and the built-in flash at the same time.  
• Auto red-eye reduction ( ) and Forced red-eye reduction (  
) may not produce the  
desired effect depending on individual differences, the distance to the subject, the  
subject not looking at the pre-recording flash or other conditions.  
• The flash effect cannot be obtained easily when you use forced flash in a bright  
location.  
• When recording with the flash, it takes longer to prepare for the next shooting. This is  
because your camcorder starts to charge power for firing after the flash pops up.  
• The flash charge lamp flashes while the power for firing is being charged. After  
charging is completed, the flash charge lamp lights up.  
• If it is not easy to focus on a subject automatically, for example, when recording in the  
dark, use HOLOGRAM AF (p. 115) or the focal distance information (p. 63) for  
focusing manually.  
• When the flash pops up, it may be up against the accessory attached to the intelligent  
accessory shoe depending on the accessory used together. In this case, set the built-in  
flash to  
pop up.  
(No flash). When you are using the external flash, the built-in flash will not  
The flash does not fire even if you select auto and  
during the follow ing operations:  
NightShot  
(auto red-eye reduction)  
– SPOTLIGHT of PROGRAM AE  
– SUNSETMOON of PROGRAM AE  
– LANDSCAPE of PROGRAM AE  
– Manual exposure  
– Flexible Spot Meter  
While recording images continuously  
The flash does not work.  
114  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
Sh o o t in g w it h a n a u xilia ry lig h t – HOLOGRAM AF  
The HOLOGRAM AF is an auxiliary light source used for focusing on subjects in dark  
places.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
Set HOLOGRAM F in  
to AUTO in the menu settings. (The default setting is AUTO.)  
When appears on the screen in a dark place, press PHOTO lightly. Then the  
HOLOGRAM AF emitter automatically emits auxiliary light until the subject is focused.  
HOLOGRAM AF emitter  
Ab o u t HOLOGRAM AF  
“HOLOGRAM AF (Auto-Focus),” an application of laser holograms, is an AF optical  
system that enables still image shooting in dark places. Having gentler radiation than  
conventional high-brightness LEDs or lamps, the system satisfies Laser Class 1 (*)  
specification and thus maintains higher safety for human eyes.  
No safety problems will be caused by directly looking into the HOLOGRAM AF emitter  
at a close range. However, it is not recommended to do so, because you may experience  
such effects like several minutes of image residual and dazzling, that you encounter  
after looking into a flashlight.  
* HOLOGRAM AF satisfies Class 1(time base 30,000 seconds), specified in all of JIS  
(Japan), IEC(EU), and FDA(US) industry standards.  
Complying with these standards ensures that the laser product is safe, under a  
condition that a human looks at the laser light either directly or even through a lens  
for 30,000 seconds.  
Notes  
• Attaching a conversion lens (optional) may obstruct the HOLOGRAM AF light and  
make focusing difficult.  
• If enough light does not reach the subject even if the HOLOGRAM AF emitter emits  
light (recommended shooting distance is up to 2.5 m (8 1/ 3 feet)), the subject will not  
be focused.  
The HOLOGRAM AF does not emit light in the follow ing cases:  
– When the POWER switch is set to CAMERA.  
NightShot  
– Flash is set to  
(no flash).  
– SUNSETMOON of PROGRAM AE  
– LANDSCAPE of PROGRAM AE  
– Manual focus  
– Spot Focus  
– Continuous photo recording  
115  
Re co rd in g a n im a g e fro m a t a p e a s a st ill  
im a g e  
Your camcorder can read moving picture data recorded on a tape and record it as a still  
image on a “Memory Stick.”  
Image size is automatically set to 640 × 480.  
Before operation  
Insert a “Memory Stick” and the recorded tape into your camcorder.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press  
. The picture recorded on the tape is played back.  
(2) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly and check the image. The picture from the tape  
freezes and the CAPTURE indicator appears on the screen. Recording does not  
start yet.  
To change the selected image, release PHOTO, select a still image again, and  
then press and hold PHOTO lightly.  
(3) Press PHOTO deeply. Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator  
disappears. The image displayed on the screen when you press PHOTO deeply  
is recorded on the “Memory Stick.”  
FINE  
640  
12  
2
3
CAPTURE  
PHOTO  
1 0 1  
FINE  
640  
1
1 0 1  
PHOTO  
Sound recorded on the tape  
You cannot record audio from the tape.  
Title recorded on the tape  
You cannot record the titles.  
Data codes recorded on the tape  
Data Codes recorded on the tape cannot be recorded on the “Memory Stick.” The date/  
time when it is recorded on the “Memory Stick” is recorded. Various settings are not  
recorded.  
When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander  
Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press  
the button.  
116  
Re co rd in g a n im a g e fro m t a p e a s a st ill im a g e  
Re co rd in g a st ill im a g e fro m o t h e r e q u ip m e n t  
You can use either the A/ V connecting cable or the i.LINK cable. Connect the  
equipment as illustrated on page 89.  
When connecting with the A/ V connecting cable, set DISPLAY in  
menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)  
to LCD in the  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
(1) Play back the recorded tape on the VCR, or turn the TV on to see a desired  
program.  
The image from the other equipment is displayed on the screen.  
(2) At the point where you want to record, follow Step 2 and 3 on page 116.  
Note  
Images may not be imported properly or distorted images may be recorded when you  
record from the tape repeatedly used for dubbing and the recording state is poor.  
117  
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e “ Me m o ry  
St ick” o n a n im a g e – MEMORY MIX  
You can superimpose a still image you have recorded on the “Memory Stick” on top of  
the moving picture you are recording. You cannot superimpose a still image on the  
tape on w hich you have already finished recording. You can record the  
superimposed images on a tape or a “Memory Stick.” However, you can record only  
superimposed still images on a “Memory Stick.”  
C. CHROM (Camera Chroma key)  
You can superimpose a moving picture on top of a still image such as an image which  
can be used as background. Shoot the subject against a blue background. Only the blue  
area of the moving picture will be swapped with a still image.  
M. LUMI (Memory Luminance key)  
You can swap the brighter area of a still image (such as a handwritten illustration or a  
title) with a moving picture. To use this function, we recommend recording a title on  
the “Memory Stick” before a trip or event.  
M. CHROM (Memory Chroma key)  
You can swap only the blue area of a still image such as an illustration or a frame with a  
moving picture.  
M. OVERLAP (Memory Overlap)  
You can make a moving picture you are recording with your camcorder fade in on top  
of a still image recorded on the “Memory Stick.” You can use M.OVERLAP only when  
the POWER switch is set to CAMERA.  
C. CHROM  
Still image  
Moving picture  
CAM  
M
CHROM  
Blue  
M. LUMI  
Still image  
Still image  
Moving picture  
M
CAM  
L UM I  
M. CHROM  
CAM  
Moving picture  
M
CHROM  
Blue  
M. OVERLAP  
Still image  
Moving picture  
OV ER –  
L A P  
118  
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o n a n im a g e  
MEMORY MIX  
Notes  
• You cannot use MEMORY MIX for moving pictures recorded on a “Memory Stick.”  
• When the overlapping still image has a large amount of white, the thumbnail image of  
the picture may not be clear.  
• When you use MEMORY MIX in the mirror mode (p. 29), the picture on the LCD  
screen appears normally without being mirror-reversed.  
Image data modified w ith your computer  
You may not be able to play back the images modified with your computer on your  
camcorder.  
The “Memory Stick” supplied w ith your camcorder stores 20 images:  
– For M. CHROM: 18 images (such as a frame) 101-0001~101-0018  
– For C. CHROM: two images (such as a background) 101-0019~101-0020  
Sample images  
Sample images stored in the “Memory Stick” supplied with your camcorder are  
protected (p. 137).  
Re co rd in g a su p e rim p o se d im a g e o n a t a p e  
Before operation  
• Insert the “Memory Stick” containing still images into your camcorder.  
• Insert a tape for recording into your camcorder.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN and select PAGE2.  
(2) Press MEM MIX. The image recorded on the “Memory Stick” appears on the  
right lower part of the screen.  
(3) Press – (to see the previous image)/ + (to see the next image) on the right lower  
corner of the screen to select the still image that you want to superimpose.  
(4) Press a desired mode. The still image is superimposed on the moving picture  
during recording standby.  
2
MEM MIX  
OFF MCCAM OVER–  
OK  
LUMI  
LAP  
MEM  
MIX  
CAMCM MCCAM  
CHROM CHROM  
Still image  
1
0
1
101–0001  
+
4
MEM MIX  
OFF  
OK  
M. LUMI  
1
0
1
101–0001  
+
+
(continued on the following page)  
119  
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o n a n im a g e  
MEMORY MIX  
(5) Press –/ + on the left lower corner of the screen to adjust the effect, then press  
OK to return to PAGE2.  
C. CHROM  
M. LUMI  
– The color (blue) scheme of the area in the moving image  
which is to be swapped with a still picture  
– The color (bright) scheme of the area in the still image which  
is to be swapped with a moving picture  
M. CHROM  
– The color (blue) scheme of the area in the still image which is  
to be swapped with a moving picture  
M. OVERLAP – No adjustment necessary  
You can use M.OVERLAP only when the POWER switch is  
set to CAMERA.  
(6) Press EXIT to return to FN.  
(7) Press START/ STOP to start recording.  
To ch a n g e t h e st ill im a g e t o b e su p e rim p o se d  
Press –/ + on the right lower corner before Step 5.  
To ca n ce l MEMORY MIX  
Press  
OFF to return to PAGE2.  
Note  
In Step 4, you cannot reselect the mode. Press  
OFF to return to PAGE2.  
When you select M. OVERLAP  
You cannot change the still image or the mode.  
During recording  
You cannot change the mode.  
To record still images as-is to the tape  
Press –/ + on the left lower corner of the screen in the M. LUMI mode and keep going  
until the bar display on the right is full.  
Re co rd in g a su p e rim p o se d im a g e o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” a s a st ill  
im a g e  
Before operation  
Insert the “Memory Stick” containing still images into your camcorder.  
Image size of still images is automatically set to 640 × 480.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Follow Step 1 to 6 on pages 119, 120.  
(2) Press PHOTO deeply to start recording.  
Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears. The image  
displayed on the screen when you press PHOTO deeply is recorded on the  
“Memory Stick.”  
To ca n ce l MEMORY MIX  
120  
Press  
OFF to return to PAGE2.  
In t e rva l Ph o t o Re co rd in g  
You can make a time-lapse recording by setting the camcorder to automatically record  
still images.  
[a ]  
[a ]  
[a ]  
[b ]  
[b ]  
[a ] Memory Photo recording  
[b ] INTERVAL  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
Operate by touching the panel.  
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU.  
(3) Select INT. R-STL in  
, then press EXEC.  
(4) Select SET, then press EXEC.  
(5) Select INTERVAL, then press EXEC.  
(6) Select a desired interval time, then press EXEC.  
(7) Press RET.  
(8) Set INT.R-STL to ON, then press EXEC.  
(9) Press EXIT to return to FN.  
The INTERVAL MEM STILL indicator flashes on the screen.  
(10) Press PHOTO deeply.  
Interval Photo Recording starts.  
The INTERVAL MEM STILL indicator lights up on the screen during Interval  
Photo Recording.  
PHOTO  
4
5
EXIT  
EXIT  
MEM SET 2  
INT. R -STL  
INTERVAL  
MEM SET 2  
INT. R -STL  
INTERVAL  
1MIN  
1MIN  
5MIN  
10MIN  
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
RET.  
To ca n ce l In t e rva l Ph o t o Re co rd in g  
Set INT. R-STL to OFF.  
121  
Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s o n a “ Me m o ry  
St ick” – MPEG MOVIE re co rd in g  
You can record moving pictures with sound on a “Memory Stick” (MPEG MOVIE EX).  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Press START/ STOP.  
.
Your camcorder starts recording. The camera recording lamp located on the front of  
your camcorder lights up.  
The picture and sound are recorded up to the remaining capacity of the “Memory  
Stick.” For details on recording time, see page 108.  
0:00:00  
15sec  
50min  
320REC  
[a ]  
BBB  
[b ]  
[c]  
1
0
1
[a ] Available recording time on the “Memory Stick”  
[b ] This indicator is displayed for about five seconds after pressing START/ STOP. This  
indicator is not recorded.  
[c] Number of the folder currently used for recording  
To st o p re co rd in g  
Press START/ STOP.  
122  
Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”  
MPEG MOVIE re co rd in g  
Note  
Sound is recorded in monaural.  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY  
The following functions do not work:  
– Digital zoom  
– Super NightShot  
– Color Slow Shutter  
– Wide mode  
– Fader  
– Picture effect  
– Digital effect  
– SPORTS of PROGRAM AE (The indicator flashes.)  
– Title  
– SteadyShot  
When using an external flash (optional)  
Turn the power of the external flash off when recording moving pictures on the  
“Memory Stick.” Otherwise, the charging sound of the flash may be recorded.  
Recording date/time  
The date/ time is not displayed during recording. However, it is automatically recorded  
onto the “Memory Stick.” To display the recording date/ time, press DATA CODE  
during playback. Various settings cannot be recorded (p. 40).  
Se lf-t im e r re co rd in g  
You can record moving pictures on the “Memory Stick” with the self-timer. See page  
124 for details.  
123  
Se lf-t im e r re co rd in g  
You can record still images and moving pictures on a “Memory Stick” with the self-  
timer. You can also use the Remote Commander for this operation.  
START/STOP  
PHOTO  
PHOTO  
START/STOP  
Re co rd in g a st ill im a g e  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN and select PAGE2.  
(2) Press SELFTIMER.  
The  
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.  
(3) Press EXIT to return to FN.  
(4) Press PHOTO deeply.  
The self-timer starts counting down from about 10 with a beep. In the last two  
seconds of the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts  
automatically.  
Re co rd in g a m o vin g p ict u re  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Follow Step 1 and 3 in “Recording a still image.”  
(2) Press START/ STOP.  
The self-timer starts counting down from about 10 with a beep. In the last two  
seconds of the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts  
automatically.  
To st o p t h e co u n t d o w n w h ile re co rd in g a m o vin g p ict u re  
Press START/ STOP. To restart the countdown, press START/ STOP again.  
To ca n ce l t h e se lf-t im e r  
With your camcorder in standby, press SELFTIMER and the  
(self-timer) indicator  
disappears from the screen. You cannot cancel the self-timer using the Remote  
Commander.  
When self-timer recording is finished  
The self-timer is automatically canceled.  
124  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re fro m a t a p e a s a  
m o vin g p ict u re  
Your camcorder can read moving picture data recorded on a tape and record it as a  
moving picture on a “Memory Stick.”  
Before operation  
Insert the recorded tape and a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press  
. The picture recorded on the tape is played back.  
(2) Press  
again to pause playback at the scene where you want to start  
recording from.  
(3) Press START/ STOP. Images and sound are recorded on the “Memory Stick.”  
For details on recording time, see page 108.  
50min  
N
320REC  
0:15:42:43  
0:00:03  
15sec  
3
[a ]  
BBB  
[b ]  
1 0 1  
[c]  
1,2  
[a ] Available recording time on the “Memory Stick”  
[b ] This indicator is displayed for about five seconds after pressing START/ STOP. This  
indicator is not recorded.  
[c] Number of the folder currently used for recording  
To st o p re co rd in g  
Press START/ STOP.  
Notes  
• Sound recorded in 48 kHz is converted to 32 kHz sound when recording images from  
a tape to a “Memory Stick.”  
• Sound recorded in stereo is converted to monaural sound when recording from a tape.  
Titles recorded on the tape  
You cannot record the titles.  
If the “  
AUDIO ERROR” indicator appears  
Sound that cannot be recorded by your camcorder has been recorded. Connect the A/ V  
connecting cable to input images from the external equipment used to play back the  
image (p. 89).  
Data Codes recorded on the tape  
Data Codes recorded on the tape cannot be recorded on the “Memory Stick.”  
The date/ time when it is recorded on the “Memory Stick” is recorded. Various settings  
are not recorded.  
125  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re fro m a t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re  
Re co rd in g a m o vin g p ict u re fro m o t h e r e q u ip m e n t  
You can use either the A/ V connecting cable or i.LINK cable.  
Connect the equipment as illustrated on page 89.  
When connecting with the A/ V connecting cable, set DISPLAY in  
menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)  
to LCD in the  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
(1) Play back the recorded tape on the VCR, or turn the TV on to see a desired  
program.  
The image from the other equipment is displayed on the LCD screen or in the  
viewfinder.  
(2) Press START/ STOP at the scene where you want to start recording from.  
Note  
Recording may abort unexpectedly or distorted images may be recorded in the  
following cases:  
– When there is a blank portion on the tape.  
– When recording from the tape repeatedly used for dubbing and the recording state is  
poor.  
– When the input signal is cut off.  
126  
Re co rd in g e d it e d p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s  
a m o vin g p ict u re – Dig it a l p ro g ra m  
e d it in g (o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” )  
You can duplicate selected scenes (programs) for editing onto a “Memory Stick.”  
Ma kin g a p ro g ra m  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Insert the tape for playback, and a “Memory Stick” for recording into your  
camcorder.  
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(3) Press MENU.  
(4) Select VIDEO EDIT in  
, then press EXEC.  
(5) Select MEMORY, then press EXEC.  
(6) Repeat pressing IMAGESIZE to select a desired size. The image size changes  
each time you press IMAGESIZE.  
(7) Follow Step 6 to 10 on page 86.  
4
5
EXIT  
V I DEO ED IT  
OTHERS  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
0:32:30:14  
15sec  
320  
MARK START IMAGE  
IN  
UNDO  
SIZE  
VIDEO EDIT RETURN  
TAPE  
MEMORY  
TOTAL 0:00:00  
SCENE  
0
RET.  
END  
EXEC  
To fin ish m a kin g a p ro g ra m  
Press  
END.  
The program is stored in memory until the tape is ejected.  
Notes  
• You cannot dub the titles, display indicators or the contents of Cassette Memory.  
• You cannot operate recording during Digital program editing on the “Memory Stick.”  
On a blank portion of the tape  
You cannot set IN or OUT.  
If there is a blank portion betw een the IN point and the OUT point on the tape  
The total time may not be displayed correctly.  
While making a program  
If you eject the cassette, the NOT READY indicator appears on the screen. The program  
will be erased.  
Era sin g t h e p ro g ra m yo u h a ve se t  
See “Erasing the program you have set” on page 87.  
Era sin g a ll p ro g ra m s  
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU.  
(3) Select VIDEO EDIT in  
, then press EXEC.  
(4) Select MEMORY, then press EXEC.  
127  
(5) Follow Step 2 to 4 on page 87.  
Re co rd in g e d it e d p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re  
– Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” )  
Pe rfo rm in g t h e p ro g ra m (Du b b in g o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” )  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU.  
(3) Select VIDEO EDIT in  
, then press EXEC.  
(4) Select MEMORY, then press EXEC.  
(5) Press START.  
(6) Press EXEC.  
Your camcorder searches for the beginning of the first program, then starts  
dubbing.  
The program mark flashes.  
The SEARCH indicator appears during search, the EDITING indicator appears  
while storing data in your camcorder, and the REC indicator appears on the  
screen during dubbing on the “Memory Stick.”  
When dubbing ends, your camcorder automatically stops.  
To st o p d u b b in g  
Press CANCEL.  
The program you have made is recorded on the “Memory Stick” up to the point where  
you press CANCEL.  
To e n d Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g  
Your camcorder stops when dubbing ends. Then the display returns to VIDEO EDIT in  
the menu settings.  
Press  
END to end Digital program editing function.  
Note  
Recording may abort unexpectedly or distorted images may be recorded in the  
following cases:  
– When there is a blank portion on the tape.  
– When recording from the tape repeatedly used for dubbing and the recording state is  
poor.  
The NOT READY indicator appears on the screen w hen:  
– The program to operate Digital program editing has not been made.  
– The “Memory Stick” is not inserted.  
– The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK.  
When the available recording time of the “Memory Stick” is not enough  
The LOW MEMORY indicator appears on the screen. However, you can record pictures  
up to the time indicated.  
When the program has not been set  
You cannot press START.  
128  
Ch a n g in g t h e re co rd in g fo ld e r  
You can create multiple folders up to “999MSDCF” in a “Memory Stick.”  
When you have recorded a lot of image files on the “Memory Stick,” you can assort the  
files using multiple folders for your convenience.  
The “101MSDCF” folder is set for the recording folder as the default setting.  
Cre a t in g a n e w fo ld e r  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU.  
(3) Select NEW FOLDER in  
, then press EXEC.  
EXIT  
MEM SET  
1
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
NEW FOLDER ADD  
REC FOLDER RETURN  
FILE NO.  
ADD FOLDER  
102MSDCF  
EXEC  
RET.  
(4) Select ADD, then press EXEC. A new folder is created. The maximum  
number+1 is assigned for the newly created folder. A newly created folder is  
automatically set for the recording folder.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l cre a t in g a n e w fo ld e r  
Select RETURN in Step 4, then press EXEC.  
Ch o o sin g t h e re co rd in g fo ld e r  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU.  
(3) Select REC FOLDER in  
, then press EXEC.  
1
0
1
REC FOLDER  
EXIT  
101MSDCF DATE:  
102MSDCF  
103MSDCF  
JUL  
4
2003  
12 : 24 : 24PM  
104MSDCF F I LES :  
105MSDCF  
106MSDCF  
40  
EXEC  
(4) Press r (to move to the next folder) / R (to move to the previous folder) to select  
a folder you want to use for recording, then press EXEC.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
Notes  
• Up to 9999 image files can be recorded in each folder. When a folder is full, a new  
folder is automatically created.  
• Once a folder is created, it cannot be deleted with your camcorder.  
• The more folders you have created, the less the remaining capacity of the “Memory  
Stick” becomes.  
129  
Vie w in g a st ill im a g e  
Me m o ry Ph o t o p la yb a ck  
You can view the still images recorded on the “Memory Stick.” And furthermore, you  
can play back six images including moving pictures at a time arranged in the order of  
recording on the “Memory Stick” by selecting the index screen. You can also use the  
Remote Commander for this operation.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press PLAY. The last recorded image is displayed.  
(2) Press – (to see the previous image)/ + (to see the next image) on your  
camcorder to select a desired still image.  
To ca n ce l Me m o ry Ph o t o p la yb a ck  
Press CAM.  
When no file is in the folder  
The “NO FILE AVAILABLE” indicator appears.  
Scre e n in d ica t o rs d u rin g st ill im a g e p la yb a ck  
To make screen indicators disappear, press DISPLAY/ BATT INFO.  
Image size  
Image number/ Total number of recorded images  
in the current playback folder  
1 0 1  
6 / 6  
Playback folder  
1600  
101–0006  
MEMORY PLAY  
Print mark  
Protect  
JUL 4 2003  
12:05:56 PM  
Recording date/ time/ Various settings  
+
CAM INDEX  
FN  
Data file number  
Recording data  
To display the recording data (date/ time or various settings when recorded), press  
DATA CODE during playback. You can also use the Remote Commander for this  
operation (p. 40).  
Notes on the data file number  
• The folder number may not appear and only the file name may appear if the structure  
of the folder does not conform to the DCF standard.  
• The file name flashes on the screen if the file is corrupted or the file is unreadable.  
When a “Memory Stick” contains multiple folders  
The following icons appear on the screen on the first or last images in a current folder.  
: You can move to the previous folder.  
: You can move to the next folder.  
: You can move to both the previous and the next folders.  
130  
Vie w in g a st ill im a g e – Me m o ry Ph o t o p la yb a ck  
Pla yin g b a ck six re co rd e d im a g e s a t a t im e (in d e x scre e n )  
This function is especially useful when searching for a particular image.  
Press INDEX to display the index screen.  
A red B mark appears above the image that appeared on the full screen before changing  
to the index screen mode.  
B mark  
-MARK  
MARK  
DEL  
2
EXIT  
3
1
4
This number indicates the order  
in which images are recorded on  
the “Memory Stick.”  
5
6
1 0 1  
T
1 / 40  
t
T : To display the previous six images  
t : To display the next six images  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To re t u rn t o t h e n o rm a l p la yb a ck scre e n (sin g le scre e n )  
Press the image you want to display.  
131  
Vie w in g a m o vin g p ict u re  
MPEG MOVIE p la yb a ck  
You can view moving pictures recorded on the “Memory Stick.”  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press PLAY. The last recorded image appears.  
(2) Press – (to see the previous picture)/ + (to see the next picture) to select a  
desired moving picture.  
(3) Press MPEG N X to start playback.  
(4) Adjust the volume following the steps below.  
1 Press FN and select PAGE3.  
2 Press VOL. The screen to adjust the volume appears.  
3 Press – (to turn down the volume)/ + (to turn up the volume) to adjust the  
volume.  
4 Press  
OK to return to PAGE3.  
5 Press EXIT to return to FN.  
1
PLAY  
To ca n ce l MPEG MOVIE p la yb a ck  
Press MPEG N X.  
When no file is in the folder  
The “NO FILE AVAILABLE” indicator appears.  
132  
Vie w in g a m o vin g p ict u re – MPEG MOVIE p la yb a ck  
Pla yin g b a ck a m o vin g p ict u re fro m a d e sire d p a rt  
The moving picture recorded on the “Memory Stick” is divided into multiple parts.  
You can select one of them and start playing back the picture from the scene you want  
to see. The moving picture is divided into up to 60 parts. The number of divided parts  
differs depending on recording time. When the recording time is extremely short, the  
moving picture is not divided.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Follow Step 1 and 2 on page 132.  
(2) Press < (to see the previous part)/ , (to see the next part) to select the part  
you want to play back.  
1 0 1  
1 / 20  
320  
:
:
MOV00001  
MPEG  
N X  
0
00 03  
+
CAM INDEX  
FN  
(3) Follow Step 3 and 4 on page 132.  
To ca n ce l MPEG MOVIE p la yb a ck  
Press MPEG N X.  
Scre e n in d ica t o rs d u rin g m o vin g p ict u re p la yb a ck  
To make screen indicators appear or disappear, press DISPLAY/ BATT INFO.  
Image size  
Picture number/ Total number of recorded pictures in  
the current playback folder  
1 0 1  
6 / 6  
Playback folder  
320  
MOV 00006  
0:00:12  
MPEG  
N X  
Memory playback time  
Protect  
JUL 4 2003  
12:05:56 PM  
+
CAM INDEX  
FN  
Recording date/ time (Various settings appear as  
“– – –”.)  
Data file number  
Recording date/time  
To display the recording date/ time, press DATA CODE during playback. You can also  
use the Remote Commander for this operation (p. 40).  
133  
Ch o o sin g t h e p la yb a ck fo ld e r  
You can change the folder currently chosen for playback. The currently chosen folder is  
displayed in the upper right on the screen.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN to display to PAGE1.  
(2) Press PB FOLDR.  
(3) Press –/ + to select the folder number you want to choose for playback, then  
press  
END to return to PAGE1.  
END  
PB FOLDER  
101  
FOLDER NAME :  
101MSDCF  
DATE :  
JUL  
12 : 24 : 24PM  
F I LES : 40  
+
4
2003  
+
: To select the previous folder  
: To select the next folder  
(4) Press EXIT. The images in the playback folder are played back.  
Note  
Your camcorder does not recognize folder names created or changed on the computer.  
Current playback folder  
The current playback folder is valid until the next recording is made. Once you record  
an image, the current recording folder becomes the current playback folder.  
134  
En la rg in g st ill im a g e s re co rd e d o n a  
Me m o ry St ick” – Me m o ry PB ZOOM  
You can enlarge still images on the screen and view a desired part of them.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Play back the image to enlarge in the frame.  
(2) Press FN and select PAGE2.  
(3) Press PB ZOOM. The PB ZOOM screen appears.  
(4) Press the area you want to enlarge in the frame.  
The area you have pressed moves to the center of the screen, and the playback  
image is enlarged to approximately at twice the size. If you press another area  
again, the area moves to the center of the screen.  
(5) Adjust the zoom ratio by the power zoom lever.  
You can select the image from approximately 1.1 times up to five times its size.  
W: To decrease the zoom ratio  
T : To increase the zoom ratio  
Pow er zoom lever  
3
PB ZOOM  
MEMORY PLAY  
PB  
ZOOM  
END  
To ca n ce l m e m o ry PB ZOOM  
Press  
END.  
Memory PB ZOOM is canceled w hen you press the follow ing buttons on the  
Remote Commander:  
– MEMORY PLAY  
– MEMORY INDEX  
– MEMORY +/ –  
In memory PB ZOOM  
If you press DISPLAY/ BATT INFO, the frame on the memory PB ZOOM screen  
disappears. You cannot move the part you have pressed to the center of the screen.  
Edge of the image  
The edge of the image cannot be displayed at the center of the screen.  
Moving pictures recorded on the “Memory Stick”  
Memory PB ZOOM does not work.  
To record images processed w ith memory PB ZOOM on the “Memory Stick”  
135  
Press PHOTO to record images during display. The image size is 640 × 480.  
Pla yin g b a ck im a g e s co n t in u o u sly  
– Slid e sh o w  
You can play back all the images in the “Memory Stick” or in the specified folder using  
Slide show.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU.  
(3) Select SLIDE SHOW in  
, then press EXEC.  
EXIT  
MEM SET  
2
SLIDE SHOW  
INT. R –STL  
DELETE ALL  
FORMAT  
RETURN  
ALL FILES  
FOLDER 101  
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
(4) Select ALL FILES or FOLDER sss *, then press EXEC.  
ALL FILES : To play back all the images in the “Memory Stick”  
FOLDER sss *: To play back all the images in the folder selected with PB  
FOLDER  
* The folder number is displayed in the sss.  
(5) Press START. Your camcorder plays back the images recorded on the  
“Memory Stick” in sequence. When all the images have been played back, slide  
show automatically stops and the first image is displayed on the screen.  
To ca n ce l slid e sh o w  
Press  
END.  
To p a u se slid e sh o w  
Press PAUSE.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press  
END to return to PAGE1, then press EXIT.  
To start slide show from a particular image  
Select a desired image using –/ + buttons before Step 5.  
136  
Pre ve n t in g a ccid e n t a l e ra su re  
– Im a g e p ro t e ct io n  
To prevent accidental erasure of important images, you can protect selected images.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press INDEX.  
(2) Press - MARK. The screen to protect the image appears.  
(3) Press the image you want to protect. A - indicator appears above the  
protected image.  
1
INDEX  
RET.  
-
-
MARK  
EXIT  
3
1
4
2
5
2,3  
6
-MARK  
T
1
0
1
t
2 / 40  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l im a g e p ro t e ct io n  
Press the image you want to cancel image protection in Step 3 again.  
The - indicator disappears from the image.  
Note  
Formatting erases all information on the “Memory Stick,” including the protected  
image data. Check the contents of the “Memory Stick” before formatting.  
If the w rite-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK  
You cannot set or cancel protection on images.  
137  
De le t in g im a g e s – DELETE  
You can delete all the images or selected images.  
De le t in g se le ct e d im a g e s  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Play back the image you want to delete.  
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(3) Press DEL. The DELETE? indicator appears on the screen.  
(4) Press OK. The selected image is deleted.  
1
0
1
3/40  
DELETE  
101–0003  
1600  
3
DELETE?  
DEL  
OK  
CAN–  
CEL  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l d e le t in g a n im a g e  
Press CANCEL in Step 4.  
Notes  
• To delete a protected image, first cancel image protection.  
• Once you delete an image, you cannot restore it. Check the images to delete carefully  
before deleting them.  
If the w rite-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK  
You cannot delete images.  
138  
De le t in g im a g e s – DELETE  
De le t in g se le ct e d im a g e s o n t h e in d e x scre e n  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press INDEX.  
(2) Press DEL. Then press the image you want to delete. The number of the  
selected image is highlighted.  
You can specify and delete up to a hundred image files at once.  
(3) Press EXEC. The DELETE? indicator appears on the screen.  
(4) Press OK. The selected images are deleted.  
1
INDEX  
RET.  
DEL  
EXEC  
2
EXIT  
3
1
4
2
5
6
DEL  
T
1
0
1
t
3 / 40  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l d e le t in g a n im a g e  
Press CANCEL in Step 4.  
139  
De le t in g im a g e s – DELETE  
De le t in g a ll t h e im a g e s  
You can delete all the unprotected images in the “Memory Stick.”  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU.  
(3) Select DELETE ALL in  
, then press EXEC.  
EXIT  
MEM SET  
2
SLIDE SHOW  
INT. R –STL  
DELETE ALL  
FORMAT  
RETURN  
ALL FILES  
FOLDER 101  
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
(4) Select ALL FILES or FOLDER sss *, then press EXEC.  
ALL FILES: To delete all the images in the “Memory Stick”  
FOLDER sss *:To delete all the images in the folder selected with PB  
FOLDER  
* The folder number is displayed in the sss.  
(5) Select OK, then press EXEC.  
OK changes to EXECUTE.  
(6) Select EXECUTE, then press EXEC.  
The DELETING indicator appears, then flashes on the screen.  
When all the unprotected images are deleted, the COMPLETE indicator  
appears.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l d e le t in g a ll t h e im a g e s in t h e “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Select RETURN in Step 5 or 6, then press EXEC.  
While the DELETING indicator appears  
Do not turn the POWER switch to other positions or press any buttons.  
Even if you delete all the images  
You cannot delete the folders.  
140  
Ch a n g in g t h e im a g e size – Re size  
You can change the size of recorded still images to 640 × 480 or 320 × 240. Use this  
function when you reduce the size of the image file to attach it to an e-mail. The original  
image is retained even after resizing.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) During memory playback, press FN and select PAGE2.  
(2) Press RESIZE.  
The RESIZE screen appears.  
1
0
1
3/40  
1600  
RESIZE  
101–0003  
END  
1
0
1
640 × 320 ×  
480 240  
+
(3) Press 640 × 480 or 320 × 240.  
The image is recorded as the most recent file in the currently chosen recording  
folder.  
To ch a n g e st ill im a g e s  
Press –/ + before Step 3.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press  
END to return to PAGE2, then press EXIT.  
Notes  
• You cannot resize the picture recorded with MPEG MOVIE recording.  
• You may not be able to resize image files recorded on other equipment.  
• When resizing the image file, you cannot specify FINE or STANDARD for it.  
Memory capacity of still images after resizing  
Image size  
640 × 480  
320 × 240  
Memory capacity  
About 150 KB  
About 16 KB  
141  
Writ in g a p rin t m a rk – Prin t m a rk  
This function is useful for printing out still images later.  
(You cannot specify the number for printouts.)  
Your camcorder conforms with the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standard for  
specifying still images to print out.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press INDEX.  
(2) Press  
MARK. The screen to write a print mark appears.  
(3) Press the image for which you want to write a print mark. A  
appears  
above the selected image.  
1
INDEX  
RET.  
MARK  
EXIT  
3
1
4
2
5
1
2,3  
6
MARK  
0
1
T
t
2 / 40  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l w rit in g p rin t m a rks  
Press the image for which you want to cancel the print mark in Step 3 again. The  
disappears from the image.  
If the w rite-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK  
You cannot write or cancel print marks on still images.  
Moving pictures  
You cannot write print marks on moving pictures.  
142  
— Vie w in g im a g e s w it h yo u r co m p u t e r —  
Vie w in g im a g e s w it h a co m p u t e r  
– In t ro d u ct io n  
There are following ways of connecting your camcorder to a computer in order to view  
images saved on the “Memory Stick” or recorded on the tape on a computer.  
To view images on a computer which has a “Memory Stick” slot, first eject the  
“Memory Stick” from your camcorder and then insert it into your computers Memory  
Stick” slot.  
Reference pages  
Camcorder  
connection  
jack  
Connection  
cable  
Computer  
environment  
requirements  
For  
For  
Macintosh  
Users  
Window s  
Users  
146 – 148  
150 – 151  
156 – 162  
USB cable  
(supplied)  
USB port,  
editing software  
USB jack  
Tape image/ live  
from your  
camcorder  
DV port,  
editing software  
i.LINK cable  
(optional)  
DV Interface  
144  
146 – 150  
152  
163 – 165  
USB port,  
editing software  
“Memory Stick”  
image  
USB cable  
(supplied)  
USB jack  
166 – 168  
When connecting to a computer w ith the USB port, complete installation of the  
USB driver before connecting your camcorder to the computer. If you connect  
your camcorder to the computer first, you w ill not be able to install the USB  
driver correctly.  
For details about the computers ports and editing software, contact the computer  
manufacturer.  
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n t h e t a p e  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r w it h t h e USB p o rt  
See page 146 for details.  
Insert the plug to the end.  
(USB)  
jack  
USB port  
USB cable (supplied)  
143  
Vie w in g im a g e s w it h a co m p u t e r – In t ro d u ct io n  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r w it h t h e DV p o rt  
The computer must have a DV port and editing software installed that can process  
video signals.  
DV Interface  
i.LINK  
i.LINK cable (optional)  
: Signal flow  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n t h e “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r w it h t h e USB p o rt  
See page 147 when using Windows and page 166 when using Macintosh.  
Insert the plug to the end.  
(USB)  
jack  
USB port  
USB cable (supplied)  
You can also use a “Memory Stick” Reader/ Writer (optional).  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r w it h o u t a USB p o rt  
Use an optional floppy disk adaptor for “Memory Stick” or a PC card adaptor for  
“Memory Stick.”  
When purchasing an accessory, check its catalog beforehand for the recommended  
operating environment.  
144  
Vie w in g im a g e s w it h a co m p u t e r – In t ro d u ct io n  
No t e s o n u sin g yo u r co m p u t e r  
Me m o ry St ick”  
• “Memory Stick” operations on your camcorder cannot be assured if a “Memory Stick”  
formatted on your computer is used on your camcorder, or if the “Memory Stick” in  
your camcorder was formatted from your computer when the USB cable was  
connected.  
• Do not compress the data on the “Memory Stick.” Compressed files cannot be played  
back on your camcorder.  
So ft w a re  
• Depending on your application software, the file size may increase when you open a  
still image file.  
• When you load an image modified using retouching software from your computer to  
your camcorder or when you directly modify the image on your camcorder, the image  
format may be different and a file error indicator may appear and you may be unable  
to open the file.  
Co m m u n ica t io n s w it h yo u r co m p u t e r  
Communications between your camcorder and your computer may not recover even  
after your computer recovers from Suspend status by its Suspend/ Resume function or  
from Sleep status.  
145  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o a  
co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
(Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
Complete installation of the USB driver before connecting your camcorder to  
a computer. If you connect your camcorder to a computer first, you w ill not  
be able to install the USB driver correctly.  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r w it h t h e USB p o rt  
You must install a USB driver onto the computer in order to connect your camcorder to  
the computers USB port. The USB driver can be found on the CD-ROM supplied, along  
with the application software required for viewing images.  
If you connect your camcorder and your computer using the USB cable, you can view  
pictures live from your camcorder and pictures recorded on the tape on a computer  
(USB Streaming function).  
Furthermore, if you download pictures from your camcorder to a computer, you can  
process or edit them in image processing software and attach them to e-mail.  
You can view images recorded on the “Memory Stick” on a computer.  
Re co m m e n d e d co m p u t e r u sa g e e n viro n m e n t w h e n co n n e ct in g  
w it h t h e USB ca b le a n d vie w in g t a p e p ict u re s o n a co m p u t e r  
OS:  
Microsoft Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP  
Home Edition or Windows XP Professional  
Standard installation is required.  
However, operation is not assured if the above environment is an upgraded OS.  
You cannot hear sound if your computer is running Windows 98, but you can read still  
images.  
CPU:  
Minimum 500 MHz Intel Pentium III or faster (800 MHz or faster recommended)  
Application:  
DirectX 8.0a or later  
Sound system:  
16 bit stereo sound card and stereo speakers  
Memory:  
64 MB or more  
Hard disk:  
Available memory required for installation:  
at least 250 MB  
Available hard disk memory recommended:  
at least 1 GB (depending on the size of the image files edited)  
Display:  
4 MB VRAM video card, Minimum 800 × 600 dot High color (16 bit color, 65,000 colors),  
Direct Draw display driver capability (At 800 × 600 dot or less, 256 colors and less, this  
product will not operate correctly.)  
Others:  
This product is based on DirectX technology, so it is necessary to install DirectX.  
To create a Video CD, a CD-R drive is needed.  
The USB port must be provided as standard.  
You cannot use this function in the Macintosh environment.  
146  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
(Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
Re co m m e n d e d co m p u t e r u sa g e e n viro n m e n t w h e n co n n e ct in g  
w it h USB ca b le a n d vie w in g t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” im a g e s o n a  
co m p u t e r  
Recommended Window s environment  
OS:  
Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional,  
Windows XP Home Edition or Windows XP Professional  
Standard installation is required.  
However, operation is not assured if the above environment is an upgraded OS.  
CPU:  
MMX Pentium 200 MHz or faster  
Display:  
Minimum 800 × 600 dot High color (16 bit color, 65,000 colors). (At 800 × 600 dot or less,  
256 colors or less, the screen for installing USB driver is not displayed.)  
Others:  
The USB connector must be provided as standard.  
Windows Media Player must be installed (to play back moving pictures).  
Notes  
• Operations are not guaranteed for the Windows environment if you connect two or  
more USB equipment to a single computer at the same time, or when using a hub.  
• Some equipment may not operate depending on the type of USB equipment that is  
used simultaneously.  
• Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments  
mentioned above.  
• Windows and Windows Media are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in  
the United States and/ or other countries.  
• Pentium is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation.  
• All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered  
trademarks of their respective companies. Furthermore, “TM” and “®” are not  
mentioned in each case in this manual.  
147  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
(Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
In st a llin g t h e USB d rive r  
Start the follow ing operation w ithout connecting the USB cable to  
the computer.  
Connect the USB cable according to “Making the computer recognize  
your camcorder”.  
If you are using Windows 2000, log in with permission of administrators.  
If you are using Windows XP, log in with permission of computer administrators.  
(1) Turn on a computer and allow Windows to load. If you have been using the  
computer, close all software.  
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of the computer. The  
application software starts up.  
If the screen does not appear, double-click “My Computer” and then  
“ImageMixer” (CD-ROM Drive).  
(3) Select “Handycam” on the screen.  
Click  
The title screen appears.  
(4) Move the cursor to “USB Driver” and click. This starts USB driver installation.  
Click  
(5) Follow the on-screen messages to install the USB driver.  
(6) Remove the CD-ROM, then restart the computer and follow the on-screen  
messages.  
Notes  
• If you connect the USB cable before USB driver installation is complete, the USB driver  
will not be properly registered. Carry out installation again following the on-screen  
messages.  
• The title screen is not displayed if the screen size of the computer is set to less than  
800 × 600 dots and 256 colors or less. See pages 146, 147 about the recommended  
computer environment.  
148  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
(Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
In st a llin g Im a g e Tra n sfe r  
Make sure USB driver installation is complete.  
This function enables image data recorded on the “Memory Stick” to be automatically  
transferred (copied) to your computer.  
If you are using Windows 2000, log in with permission of administrators.  
If you are using Windows XP, log in with permission of computer administrators.  
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load. If you have been using  
the computer, close all software.  
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of the computer. The  
application software starts up.  
(3) Select “Handycam” on the screen.  
The title screen appears.  
(4) Move the cursor to “Image Transfer” and click.  
Click  
The Install Wizard program starts up and the “Choose Setup Language”  
screen appears.  
(5) Select the language for installation.  
(6) Follow the on-screen messages.  
The installation screen disappears when installation is complete.  
149  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
(Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
In st a llin g Im a g e Mixe r  
Make sure USB driver installation is complete.  
“ImageMixer Ver.1.5 for Sony” is an application that can capture or edit images, or  
create video CDs.  
To install and use this software in Windows 2000, you must be authorized as  
administrators. For Windows XP, you must be authorized as computer administrators.  
(1) Turn on a computer and allow Windows to load. If you have been using the  
computer, close all software.  
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.  
The application software starts up.  
(3) Select “Handycam” on the screen.  
The title screen appears.  
(4) Move the cursor to “ImageMixer” and click.  
Click  
The Install Wizard program starts up and the “Choose Setup Language”  
screen appears.  
(5) Select the language for installation.  
(6) Follow the on-screen messages.  
The installation screen disappears when installation is complete.  
(7) Follow the on-screen messages to install Win ASPI. (Only for Windows 2000,  
Windows XP users)  
(8) If DirectX 8.0a or later is not installed on the computer, continue installation  
after installing ImageMixer.  
Follow the on-screen messages to install DirectX 8.0a. After installation is  
complete, restart the computer.  
MEMORY MIX Album  
Once “ImageMixer” is installed, the MEMORY MIX album is created in “Album” of  
“ImageMixer” and sample images are stored in it.  
Those sample images can be transferred from the MEMORY MIX album to a “Memory  
Stick” so that they can be used in MEMORY MIX (p. 118).  
For details on the operation procedure, refer to the on-line help.  
Replacing Win ASPI  
To be able to use the ImageMixer CD writing function, you need to install Win ASPI. If  
a different writing application was previously installed, its writing function may not  
work correctly. If that happens, reinstall the original application and replace Win ASPI.  
Note that the ImageMixer CD writing function may not work properly.  
150  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
(Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
Ma kin g t h e co m p u t e r re co g n ize yo u r ca m co rd e r  
If you are using Windows 2000, log in with permission of administrators.  
If you are using Windows XP, log in with permission of computer administrators.  
Vie w in g p ict u re re co rd e d o n t h e t a p e  
(1) Connect the AC Adaptor, then set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(3) Press MENU.  
(4) Select USB STREAM in  
, then press EXEC.  
(5) Select ON, then press EXEC.  
(6) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB port on the computer  
using the supplied USB cable.  
The computer recognizes your camcorder, and the Windows Add Hardware  
Wizard starts.  
(USB) jack  
USB port  
USB cable (supplied)  
(7) Follow the on-screen messages so that the Add Hardware Wizard recognizes  
that the USB drivers have been installed. Be sure to allow the installation to  
complete without interrupting it.  
For Window s 2000, Window s XP users  
When the dialogue box prompting you to confirm the digital signature appears, select  
Yes” if you use Windows 2000 or select “Continue Anyway” if you use Windows XP.  
151  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
(Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n t h e “ Me m o ry St ick”  
(1) Insert the “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.  
(2) Connect the AC Adaptor, then set the POWER switch to MEMORY.  
(3) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB port on the computer  
using the supplied USB cable.  
The USB MODE indicator appears on the LCD screen of your camcorder. The  
computer recognizes your camcorder, and the Add Hardware Wizard starts.  
(USB) jack  
USB port  
USB cable (supplied)  
(4) Follow the on-screen messages so that the Add Hardware Wizard recognizes  
that the USB drivers have been installed. The Add Hardware Wizard starts  
two times because two different USB drivers are installed. Be sure to allow the  
installation to complete without interrupting it.  
You cannot install the USB driver if the “Memory Stick” is not in your camcorder  
Be sure to insert the “Memory Stick” into your camcorder before installing the USB  
driver.  
152  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
(Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
If yo u ca n n o t in st a ll t h e USB d rive r  
The USB driver has been registered incorrectly as a computer was connected to your  
camcorder before installation of the USB driver was completed. Follow the procedure  
below to correctly install the USB driver.  
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n t h e t a p e  
Step 1: Uninstall the incorrect USB driver  
1 Turn on the computer and allow Windows to load.  
2 Connect the AC Adaptor, and set the POWER switch to VCR.  
3 Connect the USB port on the computer to the (USB) jack on your camcorder  
using the supplied USB cable.  
4 Open the computers Device Manager.”  
Window s XP:  
Select “Start” t “Control Panel” t “System” t “Hardware,” and click the  
“Device Manager” button.  
If there is no “System” inside “Pick a category” after clicking “Control Panel,”  
click “Switch to classic view” instead.  
Window s 2000:  
Select “My Computer” t “Control Panel” t “System” t “Hardware” tab,  
and click the “Device Manager” button.  
Window s 98SE/Window s Me:  
Select “My Computer” t “Control Panel” t “System,” and click “Device  
Manager.”  
5 Select and delete the underlined devices below.  
Window s 98SE  
Window s Me  
(continued on the following page)  
153  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
(Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
Window s 2000  
Window s XP  
6 Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) on your camcorder, then disconnect the  
USB cable.  
7 Restart the computer.  
Step 2: Install the USB driver on the supplied CD-ROM  
Follow the entire procedure in “Installing the USB driver” on page 148.  
154  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
(Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n t h e “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Step1: Uninstall the incorrect USB driver  
1 Turn on the computer and allow Windows to load.  
2 Insert the “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.  
3 Connect the AC Adaptor and set the POWER switch to MEMORY.  
4 Connect the USB port on the computer to the (USB) jack on your camcorder  
using the supplied USB cable.  
5 Open the computers Device Manager.”  
Window s XP:  
Select “Start” t “Control Panel” t “System” t “Hardware,” and click the  
“Device Manager” button.  
If there is no “System” inside “Pick a category” after clicking “Control Panel,”  
click “Switch to classic view” instead.  
Window s 2000:  
Select “My Computer” t “Control Panel” t “System” t “Hardware,” and  
click the “Device Manager” button.  
Other OS:  
Select “My Computer” t “Control Panel” t “System,” and click “Device  
Manager.”  
6 Select “Other devices.”  
Select the device prefixed with the “?” mark and delete.  
Ex: (?)Sony Handycam  
7 Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) on your camcorder, then disconnect the  
USB cable.  
8 Restart the computer.  
Step2: Install the USB driver on the supplied CD-ROM  
Follow the entire procedure in “Installing the USB driver” on page 148.  
155  
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n t h e t a p e o n  
a co m p u t e r  
– USB St re a m in g (Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s w it h “ Im a g e Mixe r Ve r.1.5 fo r So n y”  
You need to install the USB driver and ImageMixer to view images recorded on the tape  
on a computer (p. 148, 150).  
View ing pictures recorded on the tape  
(1) Turn on the computer and allow Windows to load.  
(2) Connect the AC Adaptor, then insert the cassette into your camcorder.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(4) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(5) Press MENU to display the menu.  
(6) Select USB STREAM in  
, then press EXEC.  
(7) Select ON, then press EXEC.  
(8) Select “Start” t “Programs” t “PIXELA” t “ImageMixer” t “ImageMixer  
Ver.1.5 for Sony.”  
The “ImageMixer Ver.1.5 for Sony” startup screen appears on the computer.  
The title screen appears.  
(9) Click  
on the screen.  
(10) Click  
.
Monitor window  
156  
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n t h e t a p e o n a co m p u t e r  
– USB St re a m in g (Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
(11) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB port on the computer  
using the supplied USB cable.  
(USB) jack  
USB port  
USB cable (supplied)  
(12) Click  
N
to start playback.  
You can control video operations with the buttons on the screen.  
The picture from the tape appears on the monitor window on the computer.  
Monitor window  
N
Video control buttons  
View ing pictures live from your camcorder  
(1) Follow Step 1 and 2 on page 156.  
(2) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.  
(3) Follow Step 4 to 11 on pages 156, 157.  
The picture from your camcorder appears on the monitor window on the  
computer.  
157  
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n t h e t a p e o n a co m p u t e r  
– USB St re a m in g (Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
Ca p t u rin g st ill im a g e s  
Monitor window  
Thumbnail list window  
(1) Click  
.
(2) Looking at the monitor window, move the cursor to  
point you want to capture.  
and click it at the  
The still image on the screen is captured.  
Captured images appear in the thumbnail list window.  
Ca p t u rin g m o vin g p ict u re s  
Thumbnail list window  
Monitor window  
Video control buttons  
(1) Click  
.
(2) Click  
(3) Looking at the monitor window, click  
want to capture. changes to  
N
to start playback.  
at the first scene of the movie you  
at the last scene you want to  
.
(4) Looking at the monitor window, click  
capture.  
The moving picture is captured. The captured images appear in the thumbnail  
list window.  
To clo se “ Im a g e Mixe r”  
Click  
in the upper right corner of the screen.  
158  
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n t h e t a p e o n a co m p u t e r  
– USB St re a m in g (Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
Notes  
• When you view images on a computer with the USB connection, the following may  
occur. This is not a malfunction.  
– The image shakes up and down.  
– Some images are not displayed correctly due to noise, etc.  
– Some images are displayed with the cracking noise.  
– Images of different color systems to that of your camcorder are not displayed  
correctly.  
• When your camcorder is in standby with a cassette inserted, it turns off automatically  
after five minutes.  
• We recommend setting DEMO MODE to OFF in the menu settings when your  
camcorder is in standby, and no cassette is inserted.  
• Indicators on the screen of your camcorder do not appear on images that are captured  
into the computer.  
• If you capture a fast moving picture, the picture in the monitor window may not move  
smoothly. You can make the picture move more smoothly by adjusting the slider  
located just under the right bottom of the monitor window, although this reduces the  
picture quality.  
• You cannot carry out any “Memory Stick” operations during the USB streaming.  
If image data cannot be transferred by the USB connection  
The USB driver has been registered incorrectly as the computer was connected to your  
camcorder before installation of the USB driver was complete. Reinstall the USB driver  
following the procedure on page 153.  
If any trouble occurs  
Close all running applications, then restart the computer.  
Carry out the follow ing operations after quitting the application:  
– Disconnect the USB cable.  
– Turn the POWER switch to another position on your camcorder.  
159  
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n t h e t a p e o n a co m p u t e r  
– USB St re a m in g (Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
Ma kin g Vid e o CDs – Ea sy Vid e o CD  
This function makes it simple to create a video CD by capturing images recorded on the  
tape or images live from your camcorder.  
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s re co rd e d o n t h e t a p e o n t o a CD-R  
(1) Follow Step 1 to 8 on page 156.  
(2) Press  
capture images onto the CD-R.  
(3) Click  
after choosing the point on the tape from which you want to  
.
(4) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB port on the computer  
using the supplied USB cable.  
(5) Insert a new CD-R in the CD-R drive of the computer.  
(6) Click “Start.”  
The tape is automatically played back. Easy Video CD automatically begins to  
capture images onto the CD-R to create a Video CD.  
(7) After the “Video CD successfully created.” message appears, click “Quit.”  
160  
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n t h e t a p e o n a co m p u t e r  
– USB St re a m in g (Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s live fro m yo u r ca m co rd e r o n t o a CD-R  
Eject the cassette beforehand if inserted. If the cassette is inserted, your camcorder  
automatically turns off when it has been in recording standby for more than five  
minutes.  
(1) Follow Step 1 and 2 on page 156.  
(2) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA on your camcorder.  
(3) Follow Step 4 to 8 on page 156.  
(4) Follow Step 3 to 7 in “Capturing images recorded on the tape onto a CD-R” on  
page 160.  
Notes  
• A computer equipped with a CD-R drive is required.  
• Do not press any buttons on your camcorder while creating a video CD. If you press  
, images on the tape are recorded on the video CD up to the point where you  
have pressed  
and Easy Video CD quits.  
• Once you have created a video CD, you cannot add any images onto the CD.  
• On the “Option” screen, select the hard disk that has enough space (more than about  
6 GB) for the “Location of work folder.”  
Pla yin g b a ck a vid e o CD  
You can play back the video CD you made on a DVD player or on a computer equipped  
with a DVD drive.  
To play back a Video CD on the computer, application software that supports a Video  
CD needs to be installed in it.  
You can play back a Video CD using the Windows Media Player. However, you may  
not be able to play back a Video CD depending on your computer environment  
including Operating Systems or hardware. Menu functions of the Windows Media  
Player do not function.  
(1) Start up the Windows Media Player.  
Window s XP:  
Select “Start” t “All Programs” t “Accessories” t “Entertainment,” and  
click the “Windows Media Player.”  
Other Operating Systems:  
Select “Start” t “Programs” t “Accessories” t “Entertainment,” and click  
the “Windows Media Player.”  
(2) Select “My computer” t “CD-R,” and click “MPEGAV” folder, then drag and  
drop the moving picture file “sss*.DAT” onto the screen of the Windows  
Media Player. The moving picture is played back.  
* The file number is displayed in the sss.  
Maximum recording time on a video CD is about one hour.  
Easy Video CD divides the images to be captured into about 4 GB and captures each of  
the divided files every ten minutes due to the specifications of the AVI format. A few  
seconds of images may drop out at the jointed part between the divided files when  
playing back the recorded files.  
161  
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n t h e t a p e o n a co m p u t e r  
– USB St re a m in g (Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
Se e in g t h e o n -lin e h e lp (o p e ra t in g in st ru ct io n s) o f Im a g e Mixe r  
A “ImageMixer Ver.1.5 for Sony” on-line help site is available where you can find the  
detailed operating method of “ImageMixer Ver.1.5 for Sony.”  
(1) Click  
located in the upper-right corner of the screen.  
The ImageMixers Manual screen appears.  
(2) You can find the information you need from the list of contents.  
To close the on-line help  
Click  
at the top right of the screen.  
If you have any questions about ImageMixer  
“ImageMixer Ver.1.5 for Sony” is the product of PIXELA corporation. For details, refer  
to the operating instructions of the CD-ROM supplied with your camcorder.  
162  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n t h e  
Me m o ry St ick” o n a co m p u t e r  
(Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
The image data recorded on the “Memory Stick” is automatically transferred (copied) to  
a computer with Image Transfer. You can view images with ImageMixer.  
You need to install the USB driver and Image Transfer to view the “Memory Stick”  
images on a computer (p. 148, 149).  
(1) Turn on the computer and allow Windows to load.  
(2) Insert the “Memory Stick” into your camcorder, then connect the AC Adaptor  
to you camcorder.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY.  
(4) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB port on the computer  
using the supplied USB cable.  
(5) Image Transfer automatically starts up and the transfer of image data begins.  
(6) ImageMixer automatically starts up, enabling you to view the copied image.  
Import button  
(7) Select an album and the image, then press the import button. The image is  
added to your album, and you can edit the image.  
163  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o n a co m p u t e r  
(Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
Vie w in g im a g e s w it h o u t Im a g e Tra n sfe r  
Before operation  
• You need to install the USB driver to view the “Memory Stick” images on a computer  
(p. 148).  
• An application such as Windows Media Player must be installed to play back moving  
pictures in Windows environment.  
(1) Turn on the computer and allow Windows to load.  
(2) Insert the “Memory Stick” into your camcorder, then connect the AC Adaptor  
to your camcorder.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY.  
(4) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB port on the computer  
using the supplied USB cable.  
The USB MODE indicator appears on the screen of your camcorder.  
(USB) jack  
USB port  
USB cable (supplied)  
(5) Open “My Computer” on Windows and double-click the newly recognized  
drive (Example: “Removable Disk (F:)”).  
The folders inside the “Memory Stick” appear.  
(6) Double-click a desired image file after opening the folders in the following  
order.  
1)  
“DCIM” folder t sss MSDCF” folder t Image file 2)  
See “Image file storage destinations and image files” (p. 165), for the details on  
the folder and file name.  
1)  
sss stands for any number (within the range) from 101 to 999.  
Copying a file to the hard disk of the computer before viewing it is  
2)  
recommended. If you play back the file directly from the “Memory Stick,”  
the image and sound may be damaged.  
164  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o n a co m p u t e r  
(Fo r Win d o w s u se rs)  
Im a g e file st o ra g e d e st in a t io n s a n d im a g e file s  
Image files recorded with your camcorder are grouped in folders.  
The meanings of the file names are as follows. ssss stands for any number within  
the range from 0001 to 9999.  
Fo r Win d o w s Me u se rs  
(Wh e n yo u r ca m co rd e r is re co g n ize d a s t h e d rive [F:])  
Folder containing image files recorded using  
other camcorders w ithout the folder creation  
function (for playback only)  
Folder containing image files recorded w ith your  
camcorder  
When no new folders have been created, there  
is only “101MSDCF.”  
Folder containing moving picture data recorded  
using other camcorders w ithout the folder  
creation function (for playback only)  
Folder  
File  
Meaning  
101MSDCF  
DSC0ssss.JPG  
MOV0ssss.MPG  
Still image file  
Moving picture file  
(up to 999MSDCF)  
Disco n n e ct t h e USB ca b le a n d e je ct t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o r se t  
t h e POWER sw it ch t o OFF (CHG)  
For Window s 2000, Window s Me, Window s XP users  
(1) Move the cursor to the  
“Unplug or Eject Hardware” on the Task Tray and  
click it to cancel the applicable drive.  
(2) After the “Safe to remove” message appears, disconnect the USB cable and  
eject the “Memory Stick” or set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).  
165  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o a  
co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
(Fo r Ma cin t o sh u se rs)  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r w it h t h e USB ca b le  
You must install a USB driver onto a computer in order to connect your camcorder to  
the computers USB port. The USB driver can be found on the CD-ROM supplied, along  
with the application software required for viewing images.  
Re co m m e n d e d Ma cin t o sh e n viro n m e n t  
Mac OS 8.5.1/ 8.6/ 9.0/ 9.1/ 9.2 or Mac OS X (v10.0/ v10.1/ v10.2) standard installation is  
required.  
However, note that the update to Mac OS 9.0/ 9.1 should be used for the following  
models.  
• iMac with the Mac OS 8.6 standard installation and a slot loading type CD-ROM drive  
• iBook or Power Mac G4 with the Mac OS 8.6 standard installation  
The USB port must be provided as standard.  
QuickTime 3.0 or newer must be installed to play back moving pictures.  
Notes  
• Operations are not guaranteed for the Macintosh environment if you connect two or  
more USB equipment to a single computer at the same time, or when using a hub.  
• Some equipment may not operate depending on the type of USB equipment that is  
used simultaneously.  
• Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments  
mentioned above.  
• Macintosh and Mac OS, iBook, Power Mac or QuickTime are trademarks of Apple  
Computer Inc.  
• All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered  
trademarks of their respective companies. Furthermore, “TM” and “®” are not  
mentioned in each case in this manual.  
166  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
(Fo r Ma cin t o sh u se rs)  
In st a llin g t h e USB d rive r  
Do not connect the USB cable to a computer before installation of the USB  
driver is complete.  
For Mac OS 8.5.1/8.6/9.0 users  
(1) Turn on the computer and allow the Mac OS to load. If you have been using  
the computer, close all software.  
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of the computer.  
The application software screen appears.  
(3) Select “Handycam” on the screen.  
The title screen appears.  
(4) Click “USB Driver” to open the folder containing the six files related to  
“Driver.”  
Click  
(5) Select the following two files, and drag and drop them into the System Folder.  
• Sony Camcorder USB Driver  
• Sony Camcorder USB Shim  
(6) When the message appears, click “OK.”  
The USB driver is installed on the computer.  
(7) Eject the CD-ROM from the computer.  
(8) Restart the computer.  
For Mac OS 9.1/9.2/Mac OS X (v10.0/v10.1/v10.2)  
The USB driver needs not be installed. Your camcorder is automatically recognized as a  
drive just by connecting your Mac using the USB cable.  
167  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n “ Me m o ry  
St ick” o n a co m p u t e r  
(Fo r Ma cin t o sh u se rs)  
Vie w in g im a g e s  
Before operation  
• You need to install the USB driver to view the “Memory Stick” images on a computer  
(p. 167).  
• QuickTime 3.0 or newer must be installed to play back moving pictures.  
(1) Turn on the computer and allow Mac OS to load.  
(2) Insert the “Memory Stick” into your camcorder, then connect the AC Adaptor  
to your camcorder.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY.  
(4) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB port on the computer  
using the supplied USB cable.  
The USB MODE indicator appears on the screen of your camcorder.  
(5) Double-click the “Memory Stick” icon on the desktop.  
The folders inside the “Memory Stick” are displayed.  
(6) Double-click a desired image file after opening the folders in the following  
order.  
1)  
“DCIM” folder t sss MSDCF” folder t Image file 2)  
1)  
sss stands for any number (within the range) from 101 to 999.  
Copying a file to the hard disk of the computer before viewing it is  
2)  
recommended. If you play back the file directly from the “Memory Stick,”  
the image and sound may be damaged.  
Disco n n e ct t h e USB ca b le a n d e je ct t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o r se t  
t h e POWER sw it ch t o OFF (CHG)  
(1) Close all running applications.  
Make sure that the “Memory Stick” access lamp of your camcorder is not lit.  
(2) Drag the “Memory Stick” icon into the “Trash.” Alternatively, select the  
“Memory Stick” icon by clicking on it, then select “Eject disk” from the  
“Special” menu at the top left of the screen.  
(3) Disconnect the USB cable and eject the “Memory Stick” or set the POWER  
switch to OFF (CHG).  
For Mac OS X (v10.0) users  
Shut down the computer, then disconnect the USB cable and eject the “Memory Stick”  
or set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).  
168  
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s fro m a n a n a lo g vid e o  
u n it o n a co m p u t e r  
– Sig n a l co n ve rt fu n ct io n  
You can capture images and sound from an analog video unit connected to a computer  
which has the DV port via your camcorder.  
Before operation  
Set DISPLAY in  
to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU.  
(3) Select A/ V t DV OUT in  
(4) Select ON, then press EXEC.  
, then press EXEC.  
(5) Start playback on the analog video unit.  
(6) Start capturing procedures on the computer.  
The operation procedures depend on the computer and the software you are  
using.  
For details of how to capture images, refer to the operating instructions of the  
computer and software.  
Yellow  
OUT  
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO/  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
Red  
VCR  
White  
: Signal flow  
DV  
Interface  
i.LINK  
i.LINK cable (optional)  
Aft e r ca p t u rin g im a g e s a n d so u n d  
Stop capturing procedures on the computer, and stop playback on the analog video  
unit.  
169  
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s fro m a n a n a lo g vid e o u n it o n a co m p u t e r  
– Sig n a l co n ve rt fu n ct io n  
Notes  
• You need the software and computer that support the exchange of digital video  
signals.  
• Depending on the condition of the analog video signals, the computer may not be able  
to output the images correctly when you convert video signals to digital video signals  
via your camcorder. Depending on the analog video unit, the image may contain noise  
or incorrect colors.  
• You cannot record or capture the video output via your camcorder when the video  
tapes include copyright protection signals such as the ID-2 system.  
If the computer has a USB port  
You can connect using a USB cable, but images may not be transferred smoothly.  
If your VCR has an S video jack  
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).  
With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V  
connecting cable.  
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the  
VCR.  
170  
— Usin g t h e Ne t w o rk fu n ct io n —  
Acce ssin g t h e n e t w o rk  
– DCR-TRV70 o n ly  
You can access the Internet using a USB device that complies with your camcorder.  
Once the access is made, you can view a Web page, send/ receive your e-mail, etc. This  
section describes only how to open the network menu.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
.
Operate by touching the panel with the stylus.  
Press NETWORK.  
The network menu appears.  
For details, refer to the Network Function/ Application Operating Instructions supplied  
with your camcorder.  
Note  
• Make sure that your camcorder is in standby with the POWER switch set to  
MEMORY/ NETWORK.  
• Do not remove the power source while operating the network functions or your  
network settings may be erased. Also, close the network function before you turn the  
POWER switch.  
On trademarks  
All product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered trademarks  
of their respective companies. Furthermore, “TM” and “®” are not mentioned in each  
case in this manual.  
Ho w t o h o ld yo u r ca m co rd e r w h e n o p e ra t in g n e t w o rk fu n ct io n s  
Hold your camcorder with your hand through the grip belt to keep from dropping it.  
The operation buttons needed for network functions are displayed on the LCD screen.  
Press the buttons with the supplied stylus.  
Aft e r u sin g t h e st ylu s  
Put it back in the stylus holder. Hold the stylus correctly as illustrated and insert it until  
it clicks.  
171  
— Cu st o m izin g Yo u r Ca m co rd e r —  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
To change the mode settings in the menu settings, select the menu items with r/ R . The  
default settings can be partially changed. First, select the icon, then the menu item and  
the mode setting.  
The POWER switch should be set to  
Operate by touching the panel.  
,
or  
.
(1) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press MENU.  
(3) Press r/ R to select a desired icon, then press EXEC.  
(4) Press r/ R to select a desired item, then press EXEC.  
(5) Press r/ R to select a desired setting, then press EXEC.  
(6) Repeat Step 3 to 5 if you want to change other items. Press  
Step 3.  
RET. to return to  
For details, see “Selecting the mode setting of each item” (p. 173).  
2
MENU  
3
EXIT  
MANUAL SET  
PROGRAM AE  
EXIT  
EXIT  
AREA 26  
OTHERS  
OTHERS  
AREA SET  
DST SET  
BEEP  
P
EFFECT  
AREA SET  
DST SET  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
REC LAMP  
RED EYE  
R
FLASH LVL  
WHT BAL  
SHARPNESS  
AUTO SHTR  
NewYork  
COMMANDER Bogota  
DISPLAY  
REC LAMP  
GMT -5.0  
JUL  
4
2003  
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
EXIT  
12 : 24 : 24  
r
R
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
RET.  
MANUAL SET  
P
EFFECT  
4
5
EXIT  
EXIT  
OTHERS  
OTHERS  
AREA SET  
DST SET  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
REC LAMP  
AREA SET  
DST SET  
BEEP  
COMMANDER ON  
DISPLAY  
REC LAMP  
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
EXIT  
ON  
OFF  
MANUAL SET  
PROGRAM AE  
RED EYE  
FLASH LVL  
WHT BAL  
SHARPNESS  
r
R
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
RET.  
R
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
EXIT  
EXIT  
OTHERS  
OTHERS  
AREA SET  
DST SET  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
REC LAMP  
AREA SET  
DST SET  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
REC LAMP  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
r
R
r
R
EXEC  
RET.  
EXEC  
RET.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
172  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
Menu items are displayed as the follow ing icons:  
MANUAL SET  
CAMERA SET  
VCR SET  
LCD/ VF SET  
MEM SET 1  
MEM SET 2  
CM SET  
TAPE SET  
SETUP MENU  
OTHERS  
Se le ct in g t h e m o d e se t t in g o f e a ch it e m  
z is the default setting.  
Menu items differ depending on the position of the POWER switch.  
The screen shows only the items you can operate at the moment.  
POWER  
sw itch  
Mode  
Meaning  
Icon/item  
MANUAL SET  
——  
——  
To suit your specific shooting requirement (p. 59)  
PROGRAM AE  
To add special effects like those in movies or on  
the TV to images (p. 55, 71)  
P EFFECT  
z OFF  
Red-eye reduction does not function.  
RED EYE R  
ON  
Preliminary flash before recording prevents red-  
eye.  
HIGH  
z NORMAL  
LOW  
To make the flash level higher than normal  
To use the normal setting  
FLASH LVL  
To make the flash level lower than normal  
To adjust the white balance (p. 49)  
——  
WHT BAL  
——  
To adjust the sharpness of the image outline with  
SHARPNESS  
R/ r  
To soften  
To sharpen  
z ON  
To automatically activate the electronic shutter*  
when shooting in bright conditions  
AUTO SHTR  
OFF  
To not automatically activate the electronic  
shutter* even when shooting in bright conditions  
* About the electronic shutter  
The electronic shutter is the function used to adjust the shutter speed electrically.  
Note on FLASH LVL and RED EYE R  
You cannot adjust FLASH LVL and RED EYE R if the external flash (optional) is not  
compatible.  
(continued on the following page)  
173  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
CAMERA SET  
Mode  
Meaning  
D ZOOM  
z OFF  
20×  
To deactivate the digital zoom. Up to 10× zoom is  
performed.  
To activate the digital zoom. More than 10× to 20×  
zoom is performed digitally (p. 33).  
120×  
To activate the digital zoom. More than 10× to  
120× zoom is performed digitally.  
EXPANDED F  
z OFF  
To deactivate the expanded focus  
ON  
While focusing manually, the center of the screen  
is displayed at twice the size (p. 63).  
16:9WIDE  
z OFF  
ON  
To not record a 16:9 wide picture  
To record a 16:9 wide picture (p. 50)  
To compensate for camera-shake  
STEADYSHOT  
z ON  
OFF  
To cancel SteadyShot. Natural pictures are  
produced when shooting a stationary subject with  
a tripod.  
HOLOGRAM F  
N.S. LIGHT  
z AUTO  
The HOLOGRAM AF emits light when focusing  
on subjects is difficult in dark places (p. 115).  
OFF  
z ON  
OFF  
The HOLOGRAM AF does not emit light.  
To use the NightShot Light (p. 35)  
To cancel the NightShot Light  
Notes on SteadyShot  
• SteadyShot will not correct excessive camera-shake.  
• Attachment of a conversion lens (optional) may influence SteadyShot.  
If you cancel SteadyShot  
The  
(SteadyShot off) indicator appears. Your camcorder prevents excessive  
compensation for camera-shake.  
174  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
VCR SET  
Mode  
Meaning  
HiFi SOUND  
z STEREO  
To play back a stereo tape or dual sound track  
tape with main and sub sound (p. 195)  
1
To play back the stereo tape with the left sound or  
a dual sound track tape with main sound  
2
To play back a stereo tape with the right sound or  
a dual sound track tape with sub sound  
AUDIO MIX  
——  
To adjust the balance between stereo 1 and stereo  
2 (p. 96)  
ST1  
ST2  
A/V t DV OUT  
z OFF  
To output digital images and sound in analog  
format using your camcorder  
ON  
To output analog images and sound in digital  
format using your camcorder (p. 169)  
LCD/VF SET  
LCD B.L.  
z
BRT NORMAL To set the brightness on the LCD screen to normal  
BRIGHT  
To brighten the LCD screen  
LCD COLOR  
VF B.L.  
——  
To adjust the color on the LCD screen with r/ R  
High intensity  
Low intensity  
z
BRT NORMAL  
BRIGHT  
To set the brightness on the viewfinder screen to  
normal  
To brighten the viewfinder screen  
Notes on LCD B.L. and VF B.L.  
• When you select BRIGHT, battery life is reduced by about 10 percent during  
recording.  
• When you use power sources other than the battery pack, BRIGHT is automatically  
selected.  
Even if you adjust LCD B.L., LCD COLOR and VF B.L.  
The recorded picture will not be affected.  
(continued on the following page)  
175  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
MEM SET 1  
Mode  
Meaning  
STILL SET  
BURST  
z OFF  
To not record continuously  
NORMAL  
To record from 4 to 25 images continuously  
(p. 111)  
HIGH SPEED To record up to 32 images continuously fast  
EXP BRKTG To record three images continuously with  
different exposure  
QUALITY  
z FINE  
To record still images in the fine image quality  
(p. 105)  
STANDARD To record still images in the standard image  
quality  
IMAGESIZE  
z 1600 × 1200  
To record still images in 1600 × 1200 size (p. 106)  
640 × 480  
To record still images in 640 × 480 size  
MOVIE SET  
IMAGESIZE  
z 320 × 240  
160 × 112  
z AUTO  
To record moving pictures in 320 × 240 size (p. 107)  
To record moving pictures in 160 × 112 size  
REMAIN  
To display the remaining capacity of the  
“Memory Stick” in the following cases:  
• For about five seconds after setting the POWER  
switch to MEMORY or VCR and inserting a  
“Memory Stick”  
• When the remaining capacity of the “Memory  
Stick” is less than two minutes after setting the  
POWER switch to MEMORY  
• For about five seconds from the start of moving  
picture recording  
• For about five seconds after completing moving  
picture recording  
ON  
To always display the remaining capacity of the  
“Memory Stick”  
NEW FOLDER  
z ADD  
RETURN  
——  
To create a new folder (p.129)  
To cancel creating a new folder  
To choose the recording folder (p. 129)  
REC FOLDER  
FILE NO.  
z SERIES  
To assign file numbers in sequence even if the  
“Memory Stick” is changed. The file number is  
reset to 0001, however, when a new folder is  
created or the recording folder is changed.  
RESET  
To reset the file number to 0001 each time the  
“Memory Stick” is changed.  
When you select image quality  
The number of images you can shoot in the currently selected image quality appears on  
the screen.  
176  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
MEM SET 2  
Mode  
Meaning  
SLIDE SHOW  
RETURN  
z ALL FILES  
To cancel slide show  
To execute slide show by playing back all the  
images on the “Memory Stick” (p. 136)  
FOLDER sss* To execute slide show by playing back all the  
images in the selected playback folder  
INT. R -STL  
DELETE ALL  
ON  
To activate Interval Photo Recording (p. 121)  
To deactivate Interval Photo Recording  
To set INTERVAL for Interval Photo Recording  
To cancel deleting all the image  
z OFF  
SET  
z RETURN  
ALL FILES  
To delete all the unprotected images (p. 140)  
FOLDER sss* To delete all the images in the selected playback  
folder  
FORMAT  
z RETURN  
To cancel formatting  
OK  
To format the inserted “Memory Stick” (p. 103)  
Formatting erases all information on the  
“Memory Stick.”  
Check the contents of the “Memory Stick” before  
formatting.  
1. Select FORMAT, then press EXEC.  
2. Select OK, then press EXEC.  
3. After the EXECUTE indicator appears, press  
EXEC.  
The FORMATTING indicator flashes while  
formatting.  
The COMPLETE indicator appears when  
formatting is complete.  
* The folder number is displayed in the sss.  
Notes on formatting  
• Do not do any of the following while the FORMATTING indicator is displayed:  
– Turn the POWER switch to other positions.  
– Operate buttons.  
– Eject the “Memory Stick.”  
• The “Memory Stick” supplied with your camcorder has been formatted at factory.  
Formatting the “Memory Stick” with your camcorder is not required.  
• You cannot format the “Memory Stick” if the write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick”  
is set to LOCK.  
• Format the “Memory Stick” if the “  
FORMAT ERROR” indicator appears.  
• Formatting erases sample images on the supplied “Memory Stick.”  
• Formatting erases protected image data on the “Memory Stick.”  
• Formatting erases newly created folders as well.  
(continued on the following page)  
177  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
CM SET  
Mode  
Meaning  
TITLE  
——  
——  
To superimpose a title or make your own title  
(p. 97, 99)  
TITLEERASE  
TITLE DSPL  
To erase the title you have superimposed (p. 98)  
z ON  
OFF  
To display the title you have superimposed  
To not display the title (p. 98)  
CM SEARCH  
z ON  
OFF  
To search using Cassette Memory (p. 75, 76)  
To search without using Cassette Memory  
To label the cassette (p. 100)  
TAPE TITLE  
ERASE ALL  
——  
z RETURN  
To cancel erasing all  
OK  
To erase all the data in Cassette Memory (p. 101)  
178  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
TAPE SET  
REC MODE  
Mode  
Meaning  
z SP  
To record in the SP (Standard Play) mode  
LP  
To increase the recording time to 1.5 times the SP  
mode  
AUDIO MODE z 12BIT  
To record in the 12-bit mode (two stereo sounds)  
16BIT  
To record in the 16-bit mode (the one stereo sound  
with high quality)  
qREMAIN  
z AUTO  
To display the remaining tape indicator:  
• For about eight seconds after the POWER  
switch is set to VCR or CAMERA with the  
cassette inserted, and your camcorder calculates  
the remaining amount of tape  
• For about eight seconds after the POWER  
switch is set to VCR and  
is pressed  
ON  
z OFF  
ON  
To always display the remaining tape indicator  
To deactivate frame recording  
FRAME REC  
INT. REC  
To activate frame recording (p. 67)  
To activate Interval Recording (p. 66)  
To deactivate Interval Recording  
ON  
z OFF  
SET  
To set INTERVAL and REC TIME for Interval  
Recording  
Notes on the LP mode  
• When you record the tape in the LP mode on your camcorder, we recommend playing  
back the tape on your camcorder. When you play back the tape on other camcorders  
or VCRs, mosaic noise may occur in pictures or sound.  
• When you record in the LP mode, we recommend using a Sony Excellence/ Master  
mini DV cassette so that you can get the most out of your camcorder.  
• You cannot make audio dubbing on the tape recorded in the LP mode. Use the SP  
mode for the tape to be audio dubbed.  
• When you mix recordings in the SP mode and in the LP mode on one tape, the  
playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be written properly  
between scenes.  
Notes on AUDIO MODE  
• You cannot dub audio sound on the tape recorded in the 16-bit mode.  
• When playing back the tape recorded in the 16-bit mode, you cannot adjust the  
balance in AUDIO MIX.  
(continued on the following page)  
179  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
SETUP MENU  
Mode  
Meaning  
CLOCK SET  
——  
To set the date or time (p. 20)  
USB STREAM  
z OFF  
To deactivate the USB Streaming function  
To activate the USB Streaming function  
ON  
LANGUAGE  
z ENGLISH  
To display the information indicators in English:  
min, REC, STBY, START, etc.  
FRANÇAIS  
ESPAÑOL  
To display the information indicators in French  
To display the information indicators in Spanish  
PORTUGUÊS To display the information indicators in  
Portuguese  
To display the information indicators in Chinese  
To display the information indicators in Korean  
z ON  
OFF  
DEMO MODE  
To make the demonstration appear  
To cancel the demonstration mode  
Notes on DEMO MODE  
• You cannot select DEMO MODE when a cassette or a “Memory Stick” is inserted in  
your camcorder.  
• When NIGHTSHOT switch is set to ON, the ”NIGHTSHOT” indicator appears on the  
screen and you cannot select DEMO MODE in the menu settings.  
• If you press the touch panel during the demonstration, the demonstration stops for a  
while, then it starts again after about 10 minutes.  
• DEMO MODE is set to STBY (Standby) at the default setting and the demonstration  
starts about 10 minutes after you set the POWER switch to CAMERA without a  
cassette or a “Memory Stick” inserted.  
To cancel the demonstration, insert a cassette or a “Memory Stick”, set the POWER  
switch to other than CAMERA, or set DEMO MODE to OFF. To set DEMO MODE to  
STBY (Standby) again, set it to ON in the menu settings, set the POWER switch to  
OFF (CHG), then back to CAMERA.  
180  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
OTHERS  
Mode  
Meaning  
DATA CODE  
(On the Remote  
Commander)  
z DATE/ CAM To display date, time and various settings during  
playback when you press DATA CODE on the  
Remote Commander (p. 40)  
DATE  
To display date and time during playback when  
you press DATA CODE on the Remote  
Commander  
AREA SET  
DST SET*  
——  
Temporarily change the area where you are using  
your camcorder  
z OFF  
Not during daylight saving time  
During daylight saving time  
ON  
BEEP  
z MELODY  
To output the melody when you start/ stop  
recording or when an unusual condition occurs  
on your camcorder  
NORMAL  
OFF  
To output the beep instead of the melody  
To cancel melody, the beep sound and shutter  
sound  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
z ON  
To activate the Remote Commander supplied  
with your camcorder  
OFF  
To deactivate the Remote Commander to avoid  
remote control misoperation caused by other  
VCR’s remote control  
z LCD  
To show the display on the LCD screen and in the  
viewfinder  
V-OUT/ LCD To show the display on the TV screen, LCD screen  
and in the viewfinder  
* Instead of DST, SUMMERTIME appears on the screen for some models.  
Note  
If you press DISPLAY/ BATT INFO with DISPLAY set to V-OUT/ LCD in the menu  
settings, the picture from a TV or VCR will not appear on the LCD screen even when  
your camcorder is connected to the output jacks on the TV or VCR.  
(continued on the following page)  
181  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
OTHERS  
Mode  
Meaning  
REC LAMP  
z ON  
To light up the camera recording lamp at the front  
of your camcorder during recording  
OFF  
To turn the camera recording lamp off so that the  
person is not aware of the recording  
VIDEO EDIT  
z RETURN  
To cancel Digital program editing  
TAPE  
To make programs and perform Digital program  
editing on the tape on the other VCR (p. 80)  
MEMORY  
To make programs and perform Digital program  
editing on the “Memory Stick” (p. 127)  
When recording a close subject  
When REC LAMP is set to ON, the red camera recording lamp on the front of your  
camcorder may reflect on the subject if it is close. In this case, we recommend you set  
REC LAMP to OFF.  
In more than five minutes after removing the pow er source  
The PROGRAM AE, FLASH LVL, AUDIO MIX, WHT BAL, HiFi SOUND and  
COMMANDER items are returned to their default settings.  
Other menu items are held in memory even when the power source is removed.  
182  
— Tro u b le sh o o t in g —  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
If you run into any problem using your camcorder, use the following table to  
troubleshoot the problem. If the problem persists, remove the power source and contact  
your Sony dealer. If “C:ss:ss” appears on the screen, the self-diagnosis display  
function has activated. See page 191.  
Du rin g re co rd in g  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
• The POWER switch is not set to CAMERA.  
c Set it to CAMERA (p. 25).  
START/ STOP does not operate.  
• Your camcorder automatically turns off to prevent the  
battery pack from running out and to protect the tape  
when your camcorder has been in recording standby for  
more than five minutes.  
c Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) and then to  
CAMERA.  
• The tape has run out.  
c Rewind the tape or insert a new one (p. 8, 39).  
• The write-protect tab is set to SAVE >.  
c Use a new cassette or slide the tab (p. 8, 195).  
• The tape is stuck to the drum (moisture condensation).  
c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at  
least one hour to acclimatize (p. 202).  
• Your camcorder automatically turns off to prevent the  
battery pack from running out and to protect the tape  
when your camcorder has been in recording standby for  
more than five minutes.  
The power goes off.  
c Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) and then to  
CAMERA.  
• The battery pack is dead or nearly dead.  
c Install a fully charged battery pack.  
• The viewfinder lens is not adjusted.  
c Adjust the viewfinder lens (p. 31).  
The picture in the viewfinder is not  
clear.  
• STEADYSHOT in  
is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
SteadyShot does not work.  
c Set it to ON (p. 174).  
• The setting is the manual focus.  
The autofocusing function does not  
work.  
c Press FOCUS to enable the autofocus (p. 63).  
• Shooting conditions are not suitable for autofocus.  
c Adjust the focus manually (p. 63).  
• The LCD panel is open.  
c Close the LCD panel (p. 28).  
The picture does not appear in the  
viewfinder.  
• The contrast between the subject and background is too  
high. This is not a malfunction.  
A vertical band appears when you  
shoot a subject such as lights or a  
candle flame against a dark  
background.  
(continued on the following page)  
183  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
A vertical band appears when you  
shoot a very bright subject.  
• This is not a malfunction.  
Some tiny spots in white, red, blue or  
green appear on the screen.  
• SLOW SHTR, Super NightShot or Color Slow Shutter is  
activated. This is not a malfunction.  
An unknown picture appears on the  
screen.  
• If about 10 minutes elapse after you set the POWER switch  
to CAMERA or DEMO MODE is set to ON in the menu  
settings without a cassette or a “Memory Stick” inserted,  
your camcorder automatically starts the demonstration.  
c Insert a cassette or a “Memory Stick” or press the LCD  
screen. The demonstration stops. You can also set  
DEMO MODE to OFF in the menu settings (p. 180).  
The picture is recorded in incorrect or  
unnatural colors.  
NIGHTSHOT is slid to ON.  
c Slide it to OFF (p. 34).  
Picture appears too bright, and the  
subject does not appear on the  
screen.  
NIGHTSHOT is slid to ON in a bright place.  
c Slide it to OFF (p. 34).  
• The back light function is active.  
c Set it off (p. 34).  
The click of the shutter does not  
sound.  
• BEEP in  
is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
c Set it to MELODY or NORMAL (p. 181).  
Black bands appear when you record  
a TV screen or computer screen.  
c Set STEADYSHOT in  
(p. 174).  
to OFF in the menu settings  
An external flash (optional) does not  
work.  
• The power of the external flash (optional) is off or the  
power source is not installed.  
c Turn on the external flash (optional) or install the power  
source.  
• Two or more external flashes (optional) are attached.  
c Only one external flash (optional) can be attached.  
Flickering or changes in color occurs.  
• These phenomena appear if you are recording in the soft  
portrait or sports lesson mode of PROGRAM AE under a  
discharge tube such as a fluorescent lamp, sodium lamp or  
mercury lamp. This is not a malfunction.  
c Set PROGRAM AE to AUTO in the menu settings.  
184  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Du rin g p la yb a ck  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
The playback button does not work.  
• The cassette has run out of the tape.  
c Rewind the tape (p. 39).  
There are horizontal lines on the  
picture or the playback picture is not  
clear or does not appear.  
• The video head may be dirty.  
c Clean the head using the cleaning cassette (optional)  
(p. 203).  
No sound or only a low sound is  
heard when playing back the tape.  
• The stereo tape is played back with HiFi SOUND in  
set to 2 in the menu settings.  
c Set HiFi SOUND to STEREO (p. 175).  
• Volume is turned to minimum.  
c Turn up the volume (p. 39).  
• AUDIO MIX in  
settings.  
is set to the ST2 side in the menu  
c Adjust AUDIO MIX (p. 175).  
The sound breaks off.  
• The video head may be dirty.  
c Clean the head using the cleaning cassette (optional)  
(p. 203).  
Displaying the record date, Date  
search does not work.  
• The cassette has no Cassette Memory.  
c Use a cassette with Cassette Memory (p. 76).  
• CM SEARCH in  
is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
c Set it to ON (p. 178).  
• The tape has a blank portion between recorded portions  
(p. 77).  
Title search does not work.  
• The cassette has no Cassette Memory.  
c Use a cassette with Cassette Memory (p. 75).  
• CM SEARCH in  
is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
c Set it to ON (p. 178).  
• There is no title in the tape.  
c Superimpose the titles (p. 97).  
• The tape has a blank portion between recorded portions  
(p. 75).  
New sound added to the recorded  
tape is not heard.  
• AUDIO MIX in  
settings.  
is set to the ST1 side in the menu  
c Adjust AUDIO MIX (p. 175).  
The title is not displayed.  
• TITLE DSPL in  
is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
c Set it to ON (p. 178).  
Noises appear and “PAL” is  
displayed on the screen.  
• The tape was recorded in a TV color system other than  
that of your camcorder.  
(continued on the following page)  
185  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Du rin g re co rd in g a n d p la yb a ck  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
The power does not turn on.  
• The battery pack is not installed, or is dead or nearly dead.  
c Install a charged battery pack (p. 15, 16).  
• The AC Adaptor is not connected to a wall outlet.  
c Connect the AC Adaptor to a wall outlet (p. 16).  
End search does not work.  
• The cassette was ejected after recording when using a  
cassette without Cassette Memory (p. 37).  
• You have not recorded on the new cassette yet (p. 37).  
End search does not work correctly.  
• The tape has a blank portion in the beginning or middle  
(p. 37).  
The battery pack is quickly  
discharged.  
• The temperature of the environment is too low.  
• The battery pack is not fully charged.  
c Charge the battery pack fully again (p. 16).  
• The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be  
recharged.  
c Replace with a new battery pack (p. 15).  
The remaining battery time indicator  
does not indicate the correct time.  
• You have used the battery pack in an extremely hot or  
cold environment for a long time.  
• The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be  
recharged.  
c Replace with a new battery pack (p. 15).  
• The battery pack is not fully charged.  
c Install a fully charged battery pack (p. 15, 16).  
• A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery time.  
c Charge the battery pack fully again so that the indication  
on the remaining battery time is correct (p. 16).  
The power goes off although the  
remaining battery time indicator  
indicates that the battery pack has  
enough power to operate.  
• A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery time.  
c Charge the battery pack fully again so that the indication  
on the remaining battery time is correct (p. 16).  
The cassette cannot be ejected from  
the compartment.  
• The power source is disconnected.  
c Connect it firmly (p. 15, 16).  
• The battery pack is dead.  
c Use a charged battery pack (p. 15, 16).  
The % and Z indicators flash and no  
functions except for cassette ejection  
work.  
• Moisture condensation has occurred.  
c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at  
least one hour to acclimatize (p. 202).  
The  
indicator does not appear  
• The gold-plated connector of the tape is dirty or dusty.  
when using a cassette with Cassette  
Memory.  
c Clean the gold-plated connector (p. 196).  
The remaining tape indicator is not  
displayed.  
q REMAIN in  
c Set it to ON to always display the remaining tape  
indicator (p. 179).  
is set to AUTO in the menu settings.  
186  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Wh e n o p e ra t in g u sin g t h e “ Me m o ry St ick”  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
Operations on the “Memory Stick”  
do not function.  
• The POWER switch is not set to MEMORY.  
c Set it to MEMORY (p. 11).  
• The “Memory Stick” is not inserted.  
c Insert a “Memory Stick” (p. 104).  
Recording does not function.  
• The “Memory Stick” has already been recorded to its full  
capacity.  
c Delete unnecessary images and record again (p. 138).  
• The “Memory Stick” formatted incorrectly is inserted.  
c Format the “Memory Stick” using your camcorder or  
use another “Memory Stick” (p. 104, 177).  
• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to  
LOCK.  
c Release the lock (p. 102).  
• You cannot record data in the 100MSDCF folder. It is only  
for playing back data.  
The HOLOGRAM AF light from the  
HOLOGRAM AF emitter deviates  
from the center of the image.  
• If the HOLOGRAM AF light reaches the subject, the focus  
is automatically adjusted.  
The HOLOGRAM AF light from the  
HOLOGRAM AF emitter is blurred  
and adjusting the focus is difficult.  
c Wipe the HOLOGRAM AF emitter with a dry cloth.  
The image cannot be deleted.  
• The image is protected.  
c Cancel image protection (p. 137).  
• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to  
LOCK.  
c Release the lock (p. 102).  
• You are trying to delete more than a hundred image files  
at once.  
c You can select up to a hundred image files to delete on  
the index screen.  
You cannot format the “Memory  
Stick.”  
• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to  
LOCK.  
c Release the lock (p. 102).  
Deleting all the images cannot be  
carried out.  
• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to  
LOCK.  
c Release the lock (p. 102).  
You cannot protect the image.  
• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to  
LOCK.  
c Release the lock (p. 102).  
• The index screen does not appear.  
c Press INDEX to display the index screen, then protect  
the image (p. 137).  
(continued on the following page)  
187  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to  
LOCK.  
You cannot write a print mark on the  
still image.  
c Release the lock (p. 102).  
• The index screen does not appear.  
c Press INDEX to display the index screen, then write a  
print mark (p. 142).  
• You are trying to write a print mark on a moving picture.  
c Print marks cannot be written on a moving picture  
(p. 142).  
• A print mark is written on 999 files.  
c A print mark can only be written on up to 999 files.  
• The image files recorded on other equipment may not be  
resized.  
You cannot resize the image file.  
• You may not be able to play back images in actual size  
when you try to play back images recorded by other  
equipment. This is not a malfunction.  
You cannot play back images in  
actual size.  
• Your camcorder may not be able to playback the following  
image files:  
You cannot play back image data.  
– Image files in the folder with its name modified with the  
computer  
– Image files with their names modified with the  
computer  
– Image files processed with the computer  
• If you record images with any other equipment, the  
images may not be played back normally on your  
camcorder.  
188  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Ot h e rs  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
A title is not recorded.  
• The cassette has no Cassette Memory.  
c Use a cassette with Cassette Memory (p. 97).  
• The Cassette Memory is full.  
c Erase unnecessary titles (p. 98).  
• The cassette is set to prevent accidental erasure.  
c Slide the write-protect tab to REC . (p. 195).  
• The tape has a blank portion between recorded portions.  
c Superimpose the title to the recorded position (p. 97).  
The title cannot be deleted.  
• The cassette is set to prevent accidental erasure.  
c Slide the write-protect tab to REC . (p. 195).  
A cassette label is not recorded.  
• The cassette has no Cassette Memory.  
c Use a cassette with Cassette Memory (p. 100).  
• The Cassette Memory is full.  
c Erase unwanted data (p. 100).  
• The tape is set to prevent accidental erasure.  
c Slide the write-protect tab to REC . (p. 195).  
Digital program editing on the tape  
does not function.  
• The input selector on the VCR is not set correctly.  
c Set the selector correctly, then check the connection  
between the VCR and your camcorder (p. 81).  
• Your camcorder is connected to the DV equipment of  
other than Sony using the i.LINK cable.  
c Set it to IR (p. 81).  
• Setting a program on a blank portion of the tape is  
attempted.  
c Set the program again on a recorded portion (p. 87).  
• The synchronization of your camcorder and the VCR is  
not adjusted.  
c Adjust the synchronization of the VCR (p. 84).  
• The IR SETUP code is not correct.  
c Set the correct code (p. 83).  
Digital program editing on the  
“Memory Stick” does not function.  
• Setting a program on a blank portion of the tape is  
attempted.  
c Set the program again on a recorded portion (p. 127).  
The Remote Commander supplied  
with your camcorder does not work.  
• COMMANDER in  
c Set it to ON (p. 181).  
is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
• Something is blocking the infrared rays.  
c Remove the obstacle.  
• The batteries are inserted in the battery holder with the + –  
polarities incorrectly matching the + – marks.  
c Insert the batteries with the correct polarity (p. 216).  
• The batteries are dead.  
c Insert new ones (p. 216).  
The picture from a TV or VCR does  
not appear even when your  
camcorder is connected to the  
outputs on the TV or VCR.  
• DISPLAY is set to V-OUT/ LCD in  
settings.  
c Set it to LCD (p. 181).  
in the menu  
189  
(continued on the following page)  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
The melody or beep sounds for  
five seconds.  
• Moisture condensation has occurred.  
c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at  
least one hour to acclimatize (p. 202).  
• Some troubles have occurred in your camcorder.  
c Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate  
your camcorder.  
No function works though the power  
is on.  
c Disconnect the AC Adaptor from a wall outlet or  
remove the battery pack, then reconnect it in about one  
minute. Turn the power on. If the functions still do not  
work, press the RESET button using a sharp-pointed  
object. (If you press the RESET button, all the settings  
(DCR-TRV70: except the network settings) including the  
date and time return to the default) (p. 15, 16, 211).  
When you set the POWER switch to  
VCR or OFF (CHG), if you move  
your camcorder, you may hear a  
clattering sound from inside your  
camcorder.  
• This is because some functions use a linear mechanism.  
This is not a malfunction.  
While charging the battery pack, the  
CHARGE (charge) lamp is not lit.  
• Charging the battery pack is completed.  
• The battery pack is not properly installed.  
c Install it properly (p. 15).  
You cannot charge the battery pack.  
• The POWER switch is not set to OFF (CHG).  
c Set it to OFF (CHG) (p. 16).  
The power runs out quickly, even  
though the remaining battery time  
indicator is full.  
c Charge the battery pack fully again (p. 16).  
While charging the battery pack, the  
CHARGE (charge) lamp flashes.  
• The battery pack is not properly installed.  
c Install it properly (p. 15).  
• Something is wrong with the battery pack.  
c If the symptom persists, disconnect the plug from the  
wall outlet as soon as possible to cut off the power, and  
contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony  
service facility.  
The buttons do not appear on the  
touch panel.  
• DISPLAY/ BATT INFO is pressed.  
c Press the LCD screen lightly.  
c Press DISPLAY/ BATT INFO on your camcorder or  
DISPLAY on the Remote Commander (p. 40).  
The buttons on the LCD screen do  
not work.  
c Adjust the screen (CALIBRATION) (p. 204).  
Image data cannot be transferred to  
your computer via the USB  
connection.  
• The USB cable was connected before installation of the  
USB driver was complete.  
c Uninstall the USB driver and reinstall the USB driver  
(p. 148, 153).  
• USB STREAM in  
is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
c Set it to ON (p. 180).  
• Your camcorder is on the point of falling into moisture  
condensation (p. 202).  
The cassette cannot be ejected even if  
the cassette lid is open.  
The cassette cannot be ejected.  
c Remove the battery pack, then install it again (p. 15).  
190  
Se lf-d ia g n o sis d isp la y  
Your camcorder has a self-diagnosis display  
function.  
This function displays the current state of  
your camcorder as a 5-digit code (a  
combination of a letter and figures) on the  
LCD screen or in the viewfinder. If a 5-digit  
code appears, check the following list of  
codes. The last two digits (indicated by ss)  
differ depending on the state of your  
camcorder.  
LCD scre e n o r vie w fin d e r  
C:21:00  
Self-diagnosis display  
• C:ss:ss  
You can service your camcorder  
yourself.  
• E:ss:ss  
Contact your Sony dealer or local  
authorized Sony service facility.  
5-digit display  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
• You are using a battery pack that is not an  
C:04:ss  
“InfoLITHIUM” battery pack.  
c Use an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (p. 197).  
C:21:ss  
• Moisture condensation has occurred.  
c Eject the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least  
one hour to acclimatize (p. 202).  
C:22:ss  
• The video heads are dirty.  
c Clean the heads using the cleaning cassette (optional)  
(p. 203).  
C:31:ss  
C:32:ss  
• A malfunction other than the above that you can service  
has occurred.  
c Eject the cassette and insert it again, then operate your  
camcorder. Do not perform this operation if moisture  
starts to condense (p. 202).  
c Disconnect the power cord of the AC Adaptor or  
remove the battery pack. After reconnecting the power  
source, operate your camcorder.  
c Replace the cassette.  
• A malfunction that you cannot service has occurred.  
c Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony  
service facility and inform them of the 5-digit code.  
(e.g. E:61:10)  
E:20:ss  
E:61:ss  
E:62:ss  
E:91:ss  
If you are unable to rectify the problem even if you try corrective actions a few times,  
contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.  
191  
Wa rn in g in d ica t o rs  
If indicators appear on the screen, check the following:  
See the page in parentheses “( )” for details.  
101-0001 Warning indicator pertaining to  
files  
Slow flashing:  
• The file is corrupted.  
• The file is unreadable.  
• You are trying to carry out MEMORY MIX  
on a moving picture (p. 118).  
Warning indicator pertaining to  
incompatible “Memory Stick”*  
Slow flashing:  
• An incompatible “Memory Stick” is  
inserted.  
Q Warning indicator pertaining to the  
tape  
Slow flashing:  
C:21:00 Self-diagnosis display (p. 191)  
E The battery pack is dead or nearly dead  
Slow flashing:  
• The tape is near the end.  
No cassette is inserted.*  
• The write-protect tab of the cassette is set to  
SAVE > (p. 195).*  
• The battery pack is nearly dead.  
Depending on the operating conditions,  
environmental or battery conditions, the E  
indicator may flash, even if there are  
approximately five to 10 minutes  
remaining.  
Fast flashing:  
• The tape has run out.*  
Z You need to eject the cassette*  
Slow flashing:  
• The write-protect tab on the cassette is set  
to SAVE > (p. 195).  
% Moisture condensation has occurred *  
Fast flashing:  
• Eject the cassette, set the POWER switch to  
OFF (CHG), and leave it for about one hour  
with the cassette lid open (p. 202).  
Fast flashing:  
• Moisture condensation has occurred  
(p. 202).  
Warning indicator pertaining to  
Cassette Memory *  
Slow flashing:  
• The tape has run out.  
• The self-diagnosis display code is displayed  
(p. 191).  
No cassette with Cassette Memory is  
inserted (p. 194).  
- The image is protected*  
Slow flashing:  
Warning indicator pertaining to the  
“Memory Stick”  
Slow flashing:  
• The image is protected (p. 137).  
Warning indicator pertaining to the flash  
Slow flashing:  
• During charging  
No “Memory Stick” is inserted.  
Fast flashing:  
• The image cannot be recorded on the  
“Memory Stick.”*  
Fast flashing:  
• The self-diagnosis display code is displayed  
(p. 191).*  
• There is something wrong with the built-in  
flash or the external flash (optional).  
Warning indicator pertaining to the  
“Memory Stick” formatting*  
Fast flashing:  
• The “Memory Stick” data is corrupted  
(p. 102).  
Warning indicator pertaining to still  
image recording  
Slow flashing:  
• The still image cannot be recorded on the  
“Memory Stick” in the current operating  
conditions (p. 47).  
• The “Memory Stick” is not formatted  
correctly (p. 177).  
* You hear the melody or beep sound.  
192  
Wa rn in g m e ssa g e s  
If messages appear on the screen, check the following. See the page in parentheses  
“( )” for details.  
• CLOCK SET  
Set the date and time (p. 20).  
• FOR ”InfoLITHIUM”  
BATTERY ONLY  
Use an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (p. 197).  
CLEANING CASSETTE  
The video heads are dirty (p. 203).  
The x indicator and “ CLEANING CASSETTE“ message  
appear one after another on the screen.  
• COPY INHIBIT  
You tried to record a picture that has a copyright control signal  
(p. 194). *  
FULL  
16BIT  
The Cassette Memory is full. *  
AUDIO MODE is set to 16BIT. You cannot dub new sound  
(p. 179). *  
REC MODE  
REC MODE is set to LP. * You cannot dub new sound (p. 179).  
You cannot dub new sound on the tape recorded in a TV color  
system other than that of your camcorder.  
TAPE  
There is no recorded portion on the tape. * You cannot dub new  
sound.  
The i.LINK cable is connected. You cannot dub new sound  
(p. 93). *  
”i.LINK” CABLE  
FULL  
-
The “Memory Stick” is full (p. 112). *  
The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK  
(p. 102).  
*
NO FILE  
No image is recorded or there is no recognizable file on the  
“Memory Stick”. *  
NO MEMORY STICK  
AUDIO ERROR  
No “Memory Stick” is inserted. *  
You are trying to record an image with sound that cannot be  
recorded by your camcorder on the “Memory Stick” (p. 125). *  
MEMORY STICK ERROR The “Memory Stick” data is corrupted (p. 104). *  
FORMAT ERROR  
The “Memory Stick” is not recognized (p. 177). *  
Check the format.  
PLAY ERROR  
The image is distorted and cannot be played back. * Reinsert the  
“Memory Stick.”  
REC ERROR  
INCOMPATIBLE  
MEMORY STICK  
Turn the POWER switch on again. *  
The “Memory Stick” inserted is not compatible  
with your camcorder. *  
• READ-ONLY MEMORY STICK A read-only “Memory Stick” is inserted. *  
Q Z TAPE END  
Q NO TAPE  
• DELETING  
The tape has reached the end of the tape. *  
Insert a cassette. *  
You press PHOTO on your camcorder while deleting data in  
the “Memory Stick.” *  
• FORMATTING  
You press PHOTO on your camcorder while formatting the  
“Memory Stick.” *  
• FOLDER NO.FULL  
You have reached the maximum of folders that can be created.  
• USB STREAMING ON GOING Your camcorder is performing the USB Streaming function.  
NOW CHARGING  
Charging the built-in flash or an external flash (optional) does  
not work correctly. *  
* You hear the melody or beep sound.  
DCR-TRV70 only  
Refer to the Network Function/ Application Operating Instructions supplied with your camcorder  
about warning messages in the network function.  
193  
— Ad d it io n a l In fo rm a t io n —  
Usa b le ca sse t t e s  
Se le ct in g ca sse t t e t yp e s  
You can use the mini DV  
cassette only.* You cannot use any other 8 mm  
,
Hi8  
ED Betamax  
, Digital8 , VHS  
, DV  
, VHSC  
or MICRO MV  
, S-VHS  
cassette.  
, S-VHSC  
, Betamax  
,
* There are two types of mini DV cassettes: with Cassette Memory and without Cassette  
Memory.  
Cassettes with Cassette Memory have the  
(Cassette Memory) mark.  
We recommend that you use cassettes with Cassette Memory.  
IC memory is mounted on this type of cassette. Your camcorder can read and write  
data such as dates of recording or titles, etc. to this memory.  
The functions using the Cassette Memory require successive signals recorded on the  
tape. If the tape has a blank portion at the beginning or between recorded portions,  
titles may not be displayed properly or the search functions may not work properly.  
Perform the following to prevent a blank portion from being made on the tape.  
Press END SCH to go to the end of the recorded portion before you begin the next  
recording if you operate the following:  
– You have ejected the cassette during recording.  
– You have played back the tape.  
– You have used Edit search.  
If there is a blank portion or discontinuous signals on your tape, re-record from the  
beginning to the end of the tape as described above.  
The same result may occur when you record using a digital video camera recorder  
that doesn't support Cassette Memory on the tape already recorded on the Cassette  
Memory-compatible digital video camera recorder.  
mark on the cassette  
The memory capacity of the cassette marked with  
accommodate cassettes having a memory capacity of up to 16K bits. 16K bits cassette  
are marked with  
is 4K bits. Your camcorder can  
.
This is the Mini DV mark.  
This is the Cassette Memory mark.  
These are trademarks.  
Co p yrig h t sig n a l  
Wh e n yo u p la y b a ck  
If the tape you play back on your camcorder contains copyright signals, you cannot  
copy it with another video camera connected to your camcorder.  
Wh e n yo u re co rd  
You cannot record softw are on your camcorder that contains copyright control  
signals for copyright protection of softw are.  
The COPY INHIBIT indicator appears on the screen, or on the TV screen if you try to  
record such software. Your camcorder does not record copyright control signals on the  
tape when it records.  
194  
Usa b le ca sse t t e s  
Au d io m o d e  
12-bit mode:The original sound can be recorded in stereo 1, and the new sound in  
stereo 2 in 32 kHz. The balance between stereo 1 and stereo 2 can be  
adjusted by selecting AUDIO MIX in the menu settings during playback.  
Both sounds can be played back.  
16-bit mode:A new sound cannot be recorded but the original sound can be recorded in  
high quality. Moreover, your camcorder can also play back sound recorded  
in 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. When playing back the tape recorded in the  
16-bit mode, the 16BIT indicator appears on the screen.  
Wh e n yo u p la y b a ck a d u a l so u n d t ra ck t a p e  
When you play back a dual sound track tape recorded in a stereo system, set HiFi  
SOUND in  
to a desired mode in the menu settings (p. 175).  
Sound from speaker  
Playing back the dual  
sound track tape  
HiFi Sound Mode Playing back the stereo tape  
STEREO  
Stereo  
Lch  
Main sound and sub sound  
Main sound  
1
2
Rch  
Sub sound  
You cannot record dual sound programs on your camcorder.  
No t e s o n t h e ca sse t t e  
To p re ve n t a ccid e n t a l e ra su re  
Slide the write-protect tab on the cassette to SAVE >.  
Wh e n a ffixin g a la b e l o n t h e ca sse t t e  
Be sure to affix a label only on the locations as illustrated below [a ] so as not to cause  
malfunction of your camcorder.  
Do not affix a label along this  
border.  
[a ]  
Aft e r u sin g t h e ca sse t t e  
Rewind the tape to the beginning, put the cassette in its case, and store it in an upright  
position.  
195  
Usa b le ca sse t t e s  
Wh e n t h e Ca sse t t e Me m o ry fu n ct io n d o e s n o t w o rk  
Reinsert a cassette. The gold-plated connector of mini DV cassettes may be dirty or  
dusty.  
Cle a n in g t h e g o ld -p la t e d co n n e ct o r  
If the gold-plated connector on the cassette is dirty or dusty, the remaining tape  
indicator sometimes does not appear correctly, and you may not be able to operate  
functions using Cassette Memory.  
Clean up the gold-plated connector with a cotton-wool swab, about every 10 times  
ejection of a cassette. [b ]  
[b ]  
196  
Ab o u t t h e “ In fo LITHIUM b a t t e ry p a ck  
This unit is compatible with the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (M series). Your  
camcorder operates only with the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack. “InfoLITHIUM” M  
series battery packs have the  
mark.  
TM  
SERIES  
Wh a t is t h e “ In fo LITHIUM b a t t e ry p a ck?  
The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack is a lithium-ion battery pack that has functions for  
communicating information related to operating conditions between your camcorder  
and an optional AC adaptor/ charger.  
The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack calculates the power consumption according to the  
operating conditions of your camcorder, and displays the remaining battery time in  
minutes. With an AC adaptor/ charger (optional), the remaining battery time and  
charging time appear.  
Ch a rg in g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
• Be sure to charge the battery pack before you start using your camcorder.  
• We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between  
10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F) until the CHARGE (charge) lamp turns off. If you charge  
the battery outside of this temperature range, you may not be able to efficiently charge  
the battery pack.  
• After charging is complete, either disconnect the cable from the DC IN jack on your  
camcorder or remove the battery pack.  
Effe ct ive u se o f t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
• Battery pack performance decreases in 10°C (50°F) or below surroundings. So, the  
time that the battery pack can be used becomes shorter. We recommend the following  
to ensure longer battery pack use:  
– Put the battery pack in a pocket to warm it up, and insert it in your camcorder  
immediately before you start taking shots.  
– Use the large capacity battery pack  
(NP-FM70/ QM71/ QM71D/ FM91/ QM91/ QM91D, optional).  
• Frequently using the LCD screen or frequently operating playback, fast forward or  
rewind wears out the battery pack faster. We recommend using the large capacity  
battery pack (NP-FM70/ QM71/ QM71D/ FM91/ QM91/ QM91D, optional).  
• Be sure to set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) when not taking shots or playing back  
on your camcorder. The battery pack is also consumed when your camcorder is  
during tape recording standby or playback pause.  
Have spare battery packs handy for two or three times the expected recording time,  
and make trial recordings before taking the actual recording.  
• Do not expose the battery pack to water. The battery pack is not water resistant.  
Re m a in in g b a t t e ry t im e in d ica t o r  
• If the power goes off although the remaining battery time indicator indicates that the  
battery pack has enough power to operate, charge the battery pack fully again so that  
the indication on the remaining battery time is correct. Note, however, that the correct  
battery indication sometimes will not be restored if it is used in high temperatures for  
a long time or left in a fully charged state, or the battery pack is frequently used.  
Regard the remaining battery time indication as the approximate shooting time.  
• The E mark indicating that there is little remaining battery time sometimes flashes  
depending on the operating conditions or ambient temperature and environment even  
if the remaining battery time is about five to 10 minutes.  
197  
Ab o u t t h e “ In fo LITHIUM b a t t e ry p a ck  
Ho w t o st o re t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
• If the battery pack is not used for a long time, do the following procedure once per  
year to maintain the proper function.  
1. Fully charge the battery pack.  
2. Use the battery pack up on your camcorder.  
3. Remove the battery pack from your camcorder and store it in a dry, cool place.  
• To use the battery pack up on your camcorder, leave your camcorder in tape  
recording standby until the power goes off without a cassette inserted.  
Ba t t e ry life  
• The battery life is limited. Battery capacity drops little by little as you use it more and  
more, and as time passes. When the available battery time is shortened considerably, a  
probable cause is that the battery pack has reached the end of its life. Please buy a new  
battery pack.  
• The battery life varies depending on how it is stored and operating conditions and  
environment for each battery pack.  
Disp o sa lin g o f t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
Certain countries or areas may regulate disposal of the battery pack used to power this  
product. Please consult with your local authority.  
“InfoLITHIUM” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
198  
Ab o u t i.LINK  
The DV Interface on this unit is an i.LINK-compliant DV Interface. This section  
describes the i.LINK standard and its features.  
Wh a t is i.LINK?  
i.LINK is a digital serial interface for handling digital video, digital audio and other  
data in two directions between equipment having the i.LINK, and for controlling other  
equipment.  
i.LINK-compatible equipment can be connected by a single i.LINK cable. Possible  
applications are operations and data transactions with various digital AV equipment.  
When two or more i.LINK-compatible equipment are connected to this unit in a daisy  
chain, operations and data transactions are possible with not only the equipment that  
this unit is connected to but also with other devices via the directly connected  
equipment.  
Note, however, that the method of operation sometimes varies according to the  
characteristics and specifications of the equipment to be connected, and that operations  
and data transactions are sometimes not possible on some connected equipment.  
Note  
Normally, only one piece of equipment can be connected to this unit by the i.LINK  
cable. When connecting this unit to i.LINK-compatible equipment having two or more  
DV Interfaces, refer to the operating instructions of the equipment to be connected.  
About the name “i.LINK”  
i.LINK is a more familiar term for IEEE 1394 data transport bus proposed by Sony, and  
is a trademark approved by many corporations.  
IEEE 1394 is an international standard standardized by the Institute of Electrical and  
Electronics Engineers.  
i.LINK Ba u d ra t e  
i.LINK’s maximum baud rate varies according to the equipment. Three maximum baud  
rates are defined:  
S100 (approx. 100 Mbps*)  
S200 (approx. 200 Mbps)  
S400 (approx. 400 Mbps)  
The baud rate is listed under “Specifications” in the operating instructions of each  
equipment. It is also indicated near the i.LINK on some equipment.  
The maximum baud rate of equipment on which it is not indicated such as this unit is  
“S100.”  
When units are connected to equipment having a different maximum baud rate, the  
baud rate sometimes differs from the indicated baud rate.  
*What is Mbps?  
Mbps stands for megabits per second, or the amount of data that can be sent or received  
in one second. For example, a baud rate of 100 Mbps means that 100 megabits of data  
can be sent in one second.  
199  
Ab o u t i.LINK  
i.LINK fu n ct io n s o n t h is u n it  
For details on how to dub when this unit is connected to other video equipment having  
DV Interface, see pages 78, 89.  
This unit can also be connected to other i.LINK (DV Interface) compatible equipment  
made by Sony (e.g. VAIO series personal computer) other than video equipment.  
Before connecting this unit to your computer, make sure that application software  
supported by this unit is already installed on your computer.  
Beware that some of the video equipment such as the Digital Televisions, the DVD  
recorders/ players or the MICROMV recorders/ players are equipped with the i.LINK  
jack but not comapatible with the DV equipment. Be sure to confirm whether the  
equipment is compatible with the DV equipment or not before connecting your  
camcorder to it.  
For details on precautions when connecting this unit, also refer to the operating  
instructions for the equipment to be connected.  
Re q u ire d i.LINK Ca b le  
Use the Sony i.LINK 4-pin-to-4-pin cable (during DV dubbing).  
i.LINK and are trademarks.  
200  
Usin g yo u r ca m co rd e r a b ro a d  
Usin g yo u r ca m co rd e r a b ro a d  
For details on using the Network function abroad, refer to the operating instructions  
supplied with the USB device (optional) (DCR-TRV70 only).  
You can use your camcorder in any country or area with the AC Adaptor supplied with  
your camcorder within 100 V to 240 V AC, 50/ 60 Hz.  
Use a commercially available AC plug adaptor [a ], if necessary, depending on the  
design of the wall outlet [b ].  
AC-L15A/L15B  
[a ]  
[b ]  
Your camcorder is an NTSC system-based camcorder. If you want to view the playback  
picture on a TV, it must be an NTSC system-based TV with the AUDIO/ VIDEO input  
jack.  
The following shows TV color systems used overseas.  
NTSC system  
Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, Central America, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Guyana,  
Jamaica, Japan, Korea, Mexico, Peru, Surinam, Taiwan, the Philippines, the U.S.A.,  
Venezuela, etc.  
PAL system  
Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, Germany,  
Holland, Hong Kong, Hungary, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Norway,  
Poland, Portugal, Singapore, Slovak Republic, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand,  
United Kingdom, etc.  
PAL-M system  
Brazil  
PAL-N system  
Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay  
SECAM system  
Bulgaria, France, Guiana, Iran, Iraq, Monaco, Russia, Ukraine, etc.  
201  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s  
Mo ist u re co n d e n sa t io n  
If your camcorder is brought directly from a cold place to a warm place, moisture may  
condense inside your camcorder, on the surface of the tape, or on the lens. In this state,  
the tape may stick to the head drum and be damaged or your camcorder may not  
operate correctly. If there is moisture inside your camcorder, the beep sounds and the %  
indicator flashes. The Z indicator flashes at the same time while the cassette is inserted  
in your camcorder. If moisture condenses on the lens, the indicator will not appear.  
If m o ist u re co n d e n sa t io n h a s o ccu rre d  
None of the functions except cassette ejection will work. Eject the cassette, turn off your  
camcorder, and leave it for about one hour with the cassette lid open. Your camcorder  
can be used again if the % or Z indicator does not appear when the power is turned on  
again.  
If moisture starts to condense, your camcorder sometimes cannot detect condensation.  
If this happens, the cassette is sometimes not ejected for 10 seconds after the cassette lid  
is opened. This is not a malfunction. Do not close the cassette lid until the cassette is  
ejected.  
Note on moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense when you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm  
place (or vice versa) or when you use your camcorder in a hot place as follows:  
– You bring your camcorder from a ski slope into a place warmed up by a heating  
device.  
– You bring your camcorder from an air-conditioned car or room into a hot place  
outside.  
– You use your camcorder after a squall or a shower.  
– You use your camcorder in a high temperature and humidity place.  
How to prevent moisture condensation  
When you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm place, put your  
camcorder in a plastic bag and tightly seal it. Remove the bag when the air temperature  
inside the plastic bag has reached the surrounding temperature (after about one hour).  
202  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n  
Cle a n in g t h e vid e o h e a d  
To ensure normal recording and clear pictures, clean the video head. The video head  
may be dirty when:  
– Mosaic-pattern noise appears on the playback picture.  
– Playback pictures do not move.  
– Playback pictures do not appear or the sound breaks off.  
– The x indicator and “ CLEANING CASSETTE” message appear one after another  
or the x indicator flashes on the screen during recording.  
If the above problem, [a ], [b ] or [c] occurs, clean the video heads for 10 seconds with  
the Sony DVM-12CLD cleaning cassette (optional). Check the picture and if the above  
problem persists, repeat cleaning.  
[a ]  
[b ]  
[c]  
If the video heads get dirtier, the entire screen becomes blue [c].  
Note on the video head  
The video head suffers from wear after long use. If you cannot obtain a clear image  
even after using a cleaning cassette, it might be because the video head is worn. Please  
contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility to have the video head  
replaced.  
Cle a n in g t h e LCD scre e n  
If fingerprints or dust make the LCD screen dirty, we recommend using the cleaning  
cloth (supplied) to clean the LCD screen. When you use the LCD Cleaning Kit  
(optional), do not apply the cleaning liquid directly to the LCD screen. Clean the LCD  
screen with cleaning paper moistened with the liquid.  
203  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s  
Ch a rg in g t h e b u ilt -in re ch a rg e a b le b a t t e ry  
Your camcorder has a built-in rechargeable battery so that the date, time and other  
settings are retained even when the POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG). The built-in  
rechargeable battery is always charged as long as you are using your camcorder. The  
battery, however, will get discharged gradually if you do not use your camcorder. It  
will be completely discharged in about three months if you do not use your  
camcorder at all. Even if the built-in rechargeable battery is not charged, it will not  
affect your camcorder operation. To retain the date and time, etc., charge the battery if  
the battery is discharged.  
Charging the built-in rechargeable battery  
• Connect your camcorder to the house current using the AC Adaptor supplied with  
your camcorder, and leave your camcorder with the POWER switch set to OFF (CHG)  
for more than 24 hours.  
• Or install the fully charged rechargeable battery pack on your camcorder, and leave  
your camcorder with the POWER switch set to OFF (CHG) for more than 24 hours.  
Ad ju st in g t h e LCD scre e n (CALIBRATION)  
The buttons on the touch panel may not work correctly. If this happens, follow the  
procedure below.  
We recommend connecting your camcorder to the house current using the AC Adaptor  
supplied with your camcorder during the operation.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).  
(2) Eject the tape from your camcorder, then disconnect any connecting cable from  
your camcorder.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR while pressing DISPLAY/ BATT INFO on your  
camcorder, then keep pressing DISPLAY/ BATT INFO for about five seconds.  
(4) Touch  
(DCR-TRV70 only).  
The position of changes.  
displayed on the screen with your finger or the supplied stylus  
CALIBRATE  
Notes  
• If you do not press the right spot, start from Step 4 again.  
• You cannot calibrate the LCD screen when you rotate the LCD panel and set the LCD  
screen facing out.  
204  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s  
Pre ca u t io n s  
Ca m co rd e r o p e ra t io n  
• Operate your camcorder on 7.2 V (battery pack) or 8.4 V (AC Adaptor).  
• For DC or AC operation, use the accessories recommended in these operating  
instructions.  
• If any solid object or liquid get inside the casing, unplug your camcorder and have it  
checked by a Sony dealer before operating it any further.  
• Avoid rough handling or mechanical shock. Be particularly careful of the lens.  
• Keep the POWER switch set to OFF (CHG) when you are not using your camcorder.  
• Do not wrap your camcorder with a towel, for example, and operate it. Doing so  
might cause heat to build up inside.  
• Keep your camcorder away from strong magnetic fields or mechanical vibration.  
• Do not press the LCD screen with sharp-pointed objects other than the supplied  
stylus. (DCR-TRV70 only)  
• If your camcorder is used in a cold place, a residual image may appear on the LCD  
screen. This is not a malfunction.  
• While using your camcorder, the back of the LCD screen may heat up. This is not a  
malfunction.  
On h a n d lin g t h e t a p e  
• Do not insert anything into the small holes on the rear of the cassette. These holes are  
used to sense the type and thickness of the tape and if the recording tab is in or out.  
• Do not open the tape protect cover or touch the tape.  
• Avoid touching or damaging the terminals. To remove dust, clean the terminals with  
a soft cloth.  
Ca m co rd e r ca re  
• Eject the cassette, and periodically turn on the power, operate the CAMERA and VCR  
sections and play back a tape for about three minutes when your camcorder is not to  
be used for a long time.  
• Clean the lens with a soft brush to remove dust. If there are fingerprints on the lens,  
remove them with a soft cloth.  
• Clean your camcorder body with a dry soft cloth, or a soft cloth lightly moistened  
with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of solvent which may damage the  
finish.  
• Do not let sand get into your camcorder. When you use your camcorder on a sandy  
beach or in a dusty place, protect it from the sand or dust. Sand or dust may cause  
your camcorder to malfunction, and sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired.  
205  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s  
AC Ad a p t o r  
• Unplug the unit from a wall outlet when you are not using the unit for a long time. To  
disconnect the power cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the power cord itself.  
• Do not operate the unit with a damaged cord or if the unit has been dropped or  
damaged.  
• Do not bend the power cord forcibly, or place a heavy object on it. This will damage  
the cord and may cause fire or electrical shock.  
• Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the  
connecting section. If this happens, a short may occur and the unit may be damaged.  
• Always keep metal contacts clean.  
• Do not disassemble the unit.  
• Do not apply mechanical shock or drop the unit.  
• While the unit is in use, particularly during charging, keep it away from AM receivers  
and video equipment. AM receivers and video equipment disturb AM reception and  
video operation.  
• The unit becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.  
• Do not place the unit in locations that are:  
– Extremely hot or cold  
– Dusty or dirty  
– Very humid  
– Vibrating  
Ab o u t ca re a n d st o ra g e o f t h e le n s  
• Wipe the surface of the lens clean with a soft cloth in the following instances:  
– When there are fingerprints on the lens surface.  
– In hot or humid locations  
– When the lens is used in environments such as the seaside.  
• Store the lens in a well-ventilated location subject to little dirt or dust.  
To prevent mold from occurring, periodically perform the above.  
We recommend turning on and operating your camcorder about once per month to  
keep your camcorder in an optimum state for a long time.  
Re ch a rg e a b le b a t t e ry p a ck  
• Use only the specified charger or video equipment with the charging function.  
• To prevent an accident from a short circuit, do not allow metal objects to come into  
contact with the battery terminals.  
• Keep the rechargeable battery pack away from fire.  
Never expose the rechargeable battery pack to temperatures above 60°C (140°F), such  
as in a car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight.  
• Store the rechargeable battery pack in a cool, dry place.  
• Do not expose the rechargeable battery pack to any mechanical shock.  
• Do not disassemble nor modify the rechargeable battery pack.  
• Install the rechargeable battery pack to the video equipment securely.  
• Charging while some capacity remains does not affect the original battery capacity.  
206  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s  
No t e o n d ry b a t t e rie s  
To avoid possible damage from battery leakage or corrosion, observe the following:  
– Be sure to insert the batteries with the + – polarities matched to the + – marks in the  
battery compartment.  
– Dry batteries are not rechargeable.  
– Do not use a combination of new and old batteries.  
– Do not use different types of batteries.  
– Current flows from batteries when you are not using them for a long time.  
– Do not use leaking batteries.  
If batteries are leaking  
• Wipe off the liquid in the battery compartment carefully before replacing the batteries.  
• If you touch the liquid, wash it off with water.  
• If the liquid get into your eyes, wash your eyes with a lot of water and then consult a  
doctor.  
If any problem occurs, unplug your camcorder and contact your nearest Sony dealer.  
207  
Sp e cifica t io n s  
Minimum illumination  
7 lx (lux) (F 1.8)  
0 lx (lux) (in the NightShot mode)*  
* Objects unable to be seen due to  
the dark can be shot with  
infrared lighting.  
Ge n e ra l  
Vid e o ca m e ra  
re co rd e r  
Pow er requirements  
7.2 V (battery pack)  
8.4 V (AC Adaptor)  
Average pow er consumption  
(w hen using the battery pack)  
During camera recording using  
LCD  
4.6 W  
Viewfinder  
3.9 W  
Operating temperature  
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)  
Storage temperature  
–20°C to + 60°C  
(–4°F to + 140°F)  
Dimensions (approx.)  
73 × 90 × 174 mm  
(2 7/ 8 × 3 5/ 8 × 6 7/ 8 in.) (w/ h/ d)  
Mass (Approx.)  
640 g (1 lb 6 oz)  
main unit only  
740 g (1 lb 10 oz)  
Syst e m  
Video recording system  
2 rotary heads  
In p u t /Ou t p u t co n n e ct o rs  
Helical scanning system  
Audio recording system  
Rotary heads, PCM system  
Quantization: 12 bits (Fs 32 kHz,  
stereo 1, stereo 2), 16 bits  
(Fs 48 kHz, stereo)  
Video signal  
NTSC color, EIA standards  
Usable cassette  
Mini DV cassette with the  
mark printed  
Tape speed  
SP: Approx. 18.81 mm/ s  
LP: Approx. 12.56 mm/ s  
Recording/playback time  
(using cassette DVM60)  
SP: 1 hour  
S video input/output  
4-pin mini DIN  
Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p,  
75 (ohms), unbalanced  
Chrominance signal: 0.286 Vp-p,  
75 (ohms), unbalanced  
Audio/Video input/output  
AV MINI JACK, 1 Vp-p,  
75 (ohms), unbalanced  
327 mV, (at output impedance  
more than 47 k(kilohms))  
Output impedance with less than  
2.2 k(kilohms)/ Stereo minijack  
(ø 3.5 mm)  
Input impedance more than  
47 k(kilohms)  
DV input/output  
4-pin connector  
Headphone jack  
including the rechargeable battery  
pack NP-FM50, cassette DVM60  
and lens cap  
Supplied accessories  
See page 14.  
LP: 1.5 hours  
Fastforw ard/rew ind time  
(using cassette DVM60)  
Approx. 2 min. and 40 seconds  
View finder  
Stereo minijack (ø 3.5 mm)  
LANC jack  
Electric viewfinder (color)  
Image device  
Stereo mini-minijack (ø 2.5 mm)  
USB jack  
5.0 mm (1/ 3.6 type) CCD (Charge  
Coupled Device)  
DCR-TRV60:  
mini-B  
Gross: Approx. 2 110 000 pixels  
Effective (still):  
DCR-TRV70:  
mini-AB  
Approx. 1 920 000 pixels  
Effective (moving):  
Approx. 1 080 000 pixels  
Lens  
Carl Zeiss Vario-Sonnar T*  
Combined power zoom lens  
Filter diameter: 37 mm  
(1 1/ 2 in.)  
10× (Optical), 120× (Digital)  
F = 1.8 ~ 2.1  
MIC jack  
Minijack, 0.388 mV low impedance  
with 2.5 to 3.0 V DC, output  
impedance 6.8 k(kilohms)  
(ø 3.5 mm)  
Stereo type  
LCD scre e n  
Picture  
6.2 cm (2.5 type)  
Total dot number  
211 200 (960 × 220)  
Focal length  
4.5 – 45 mm (3/ 16 – 1 13/ 16 in.)  
When converted to a 35 mm still  
camera  
In CAMERA:  
52 – 520 mm (2 1/ 8 – 20 1/ 2 in.)  
In MEMORY:  
39 – 390 mm (1 9/ 16 – 15 3/ 8 in.)  
Color temperature  
Auto, HOLD, INDOOR (3 200 K),  
OUTDOOR (5 800 K)  
208  
Sp e cifica t io n s  
AC Ad a p t o r  
AC-L15A/L15B  
Me m o ry St ick”  
Memory  
Flash memory  
8 MB: MSA-8A  
Operating voltage  
2.7 – 3.6 V  
Pow er requirements  
100 – 240 V AC, 50/ 60 Hz  
Current consumption  
0.35 – 0.18 A  
Pow er consumption  
Approx. 45 mA during operation  
mode  
Pow er consumption  
18 W  
Output voltage  
Approx. 130 µA during tape  
recording standby  
Dimensions (approx.)  
50 × 2.8 × 21.5 mm  
(2 × 1/ 8 × 7/ 8 in.) (w/ h/ d)  
Mass (approx.)  
DC OUT: 8.4 V, 1.5 A  
Operating temperature  
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)  
Storage temperature  
–20°C to + 60°C  
(–4°F to + 140°F)  
Dimensions (approx.)  
56 × 31 × 100 mm  
4 g (0.14 oz)  
Design and specifications are  
subject to change without notice.  
(2 1/ 4 × 1 1/ 4 × 4 in.) (w/ h/ d)  
excluding projecting parts  
Mass (approx.)  
190 g (6.7 oz)  
excluding power cord  
Re ch a rg e a b le  
b a t t e ry p a ck  
NP-FM50  
Maximum output voltage  
DC 8.4 V  
Output voltage  
DC 7.2 V  
Capacity  
8.5 Wh (1 180 mAh)  
Dimensions (approx.)  
38.2 × 20.5 × 55.6 mm  
(1 9/ 16 × 13/ 16 × 2 1/ 4 in.)  
(w/ h/ d)  
Mass (approx.)  
76 g (2.7 oz)  
Type  
Lithium ion  
209  
— Qu ick Re fe re n ce —  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
Ca m co rd e r  
1
2
3
6
7
4
5
8
9
1 Flash (p. 113)  
6 FOCUS button (p. 63)  
2 Focus ring (p. 63)  
3 Lens  
7 BACK LIGHT button (p. 34)  
8 Microphone  
4 NIGHTSHOT sw itch (p. 34)  
5 DC IN jack (p. 8, 16)  
9 DC IN jack cover  
Note on the Carl Zeiss lens  
Your camcorder is equipped with a Carl Zeiss lens which can reproduce fine images.  
The lens for your camcorder was developed jointly by Carl Zeiss, in Germany, and  
Sony Corporation. It adopts the MTF# measurement system for video camera and  
offers a quality as the Carl Zeiss lens.  
The lens for your camcorder is also T*-coated to suppress unwanted reflection and  
faithfully reproduce colors.  
#
MTF stands for Modulation Transfer Function.  
The value number indicates the amount of light of a subject coming into the lens.  
210  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
q;  
qh  
qj  
qa  
qs  
qd  
qk  
qf  
qg  
0 Lens cap (p. 25)  
qf DISPLAY/BATT INFO button (p. 18, 40)  
qa RESET button  
qg Speaker  
If you press RESET, all the settings  
(DCR-TRV70: except the network  
settings) including the date and time  
return to the default.  
qh View finder (p. 31)  
qj View finder lens adjustment lever  
(p. 31)  
qs LCD/Touch panel screen (p. 23)  
qk Hooks for shoulder strap  
qd OPEN button (p. 25)  
211  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
ql  
w;  
wa  
ws  
wj  
wk  
wl  
e;  
ea  
wd  
wf  
es  
ed  
ef  
wg  
wh  
ql DV Interface (p. 78, 89, 144, 169, 199)  
e; i (headphones) jack (green)  
The DV Interface is i.LINK compatible.  
When you use headphones, the speaker  
on your camcorder is silent.  
w; (USB) jack (p. 143)  
ea Stylus (DCR-TRV70 only) (p. 171)  
wa PHOTO button (p. 46, 109, 116)  
ws Pow er zoom lever (p. 33, 73, 135)  
wd BATT release button (p. 15)  
wf LOCK sw itch (p. 26)  
es Stylus holder (DCR-TRV70 only)  
ed MIC (PLUG IN POWER) jack (red) (p. 93)  
Connect an external microphone  
(optional). This jack also accepts a  
“plug-in-power” microphone.  
When an external microphone is  
connected, it is preferred for an audio  
input source.  
wg START/STOP button (p. 25)  
wh POWER sw itch (p. 25)  
wj  
(LANC) jack (blue)  
ef Grip belt (p. 8)  
wk S VIDEO jack (p. 45, 79, 90, 170)  
wl AUDIO/VIDEO jack (yellow )  
(p. 44, 78, 89, 169)  
LANC  
The LANC stands for Local Application Control Bus System. The LANC control  
jack is used for controlling the tape transport of video equipment and peripherals  
connected to it. This jack has the same function as the jack indicated as CONTROL L or  
REMOTE.  
212  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
r;  
ra  
eg  
eh  
rs  
ej  
ek  
rd  
rf  
rg  
el  
eg Intelligent accessory shoe (p. 94)  
eh Shoe cover (p. 94)  
r; EDITSEARCH button (p. 37)  
ra (flash) button (p. 113)  
ej Access lamp (p. 10, 104)  
rs Remote sensor  
ek “Memory Stick” slot (p. 10, 104)  
el CHARGE (charge) lamp (p. 16)  
rd Infrared rays emitter (p. 34, 82)  
rf Camera recording lamp (p. 25)  
rg HOLOGRAM AF emitter (p. 115)  
Notes on the intelligent accessory shoe  
• The intelligent accessory shoe supplies power to optional accessories such as a video  
light or microphone.  
• The intelligent accessory shoe is linked to the POWER switch, allowing you to turn the  
power supplied by the shoe on and off. Refer to the operating instructions of the  
accessory for details.  
• The intelligent accessory shoe has a safety device for fixing the installed accessory  
securely. To connect an accessory, press down and push it to the end, and then tighten  
the screw.  
• To remove an accessory, loosen the screw, and then press down and pull out the  
accessory.  
213  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
rj  
rk  
rh  
rl  
rl Tripod receptacle  
rh Battery pack (p. 15, 16)  
Make sure that the length of the tripod  
screw is less than 5.5 mm (7/ 32 inch).  
Otherwise, you cannot attach the tripod  
securely, and the screw may damage  
your camcorder.  
rj Cassette compartment (p. 8)  
rk OPEN/Z EJECT  
lever (p. 8)  
214  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r  
The buttons that have the same name on the Remote Commander as on your camcorder  
function identically to the buttons on your camcorder.  
8
1
9
0
qa  
qs  
2
3
4
5
qd  
6
7
qf  
1 PHOTO button (p. 46, 110, 116)  
2 DISPLAY button (p. 40)  
3 Memory control buttons  
4 SEARCH MODE button (p. 75, 76)  
5 Video control buttons (p. 43)  
6 REC button (p. 90)  
8 Transmitter  
Point toward the remote sensor to  
control your camcorder after turning on  
your camcorder.  
9 ZERO SET MEMORY button (p. 74)  
q; START/STOP button (p. 25)  
qa DATA CODE button (p. 40)  
qs Pow er zoom button (p. 33)  
qd ./> buttons (p. 75, 76)  
qf AUDIO DUB button (p. 95)  
7 MARK button (p. 86)  
215  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
To p re p a re t h e Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r  
Insert two size AA (R6) batteries by matching the + and – on the batteries to  
the + and – in the battery compartment.  
Notes on the Remote Commander  
• Point the remote sensor away from strong light sources such as direct sunlight or  
overhead lighting. Otherwise, the Remote Commander may not function properly.  
• Attaching the lens hood (supplied) or a conversion lens (optional) may obstruct the  
remote sensor, and in this situation, the remote commander may not work correctly.  
• Your camcorder works in the commander mode VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3  
are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid erroneous  
remote control operation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR  
2, we recommend changing the Commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR  
with black paper.  
216  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
Op e ra t io n in d ica t o rs  
LCD scre e n a n d Vie w fin d e r  
qd  
qf  
qg  
qh  
qj  
qk  
ql  
w;  
1
2
3
4
5
:
:
50min  
STBY  
0 12 34  
48min  
+
6
STILL  
16 9WIDE  
NEG. ART  
ZERO SET  
MEMORY  
END  
wa  
ws  
:
SEARCH  
AUTO  
60 AWB  
F1.8 9db  
DV IN  
16BIT  
wd  
wf  
7
8
9
0
qa  
qs  
wg  
wh  
1 Cassette Memory (p. 12, 194)  
qj NIGHTSHOT (p. 34)/SUPER NIGHTSHOT  
(p. 35)/COLOR SLOW SHUTTER (p. 35)  
2 Remaining battery time (p. 27)  
qk Warning (p. 192)  
3 Zoom (p. 33)/Exposure (p. 61)/  
Data file name (p. 102)  
ql Time code (p. 27)/Tape counter  
(p. 27)/Self-diagnosis (p. 191)/Photo  
recording (p. 109)/Image number  
(p. 130)/Playback folder (p. 134)  
4 Digital effect (p. 56, 72)/MEMORY MIX  
(p. 118)/Fader (p. 52)  
5 16:9WIDE (p. 50)  
w; Remaining tape (p. 27)/Memory  
6 Picture effect (p. 55, 71)  
7 Data code (p. 40)  
playback (p. 130)  
wa ZERO SET MEMORY (p. 74)  
ws END SEARCH (p. 37)  
8 Volume (p. 39)/Date (p. 27)/  
Time (p. 27)  
wd A/V t DV (p. 169)/DV IN (p. 90)  
wf Audio mode (p. 179)/Recording folder  
9 PROGRAM AE (p. 59)  
0 Back light (p. 34)  
(p. 129)  
qa SteadyShot off (p. 174)  
qs Manual focus/Expanded focus (p. 63)  
qd Self-timer (p. 48, 124)  
wg Flash (p. 113)  
This indicator appears only when the  
flash is in use.  
qf Recording mode (p. 27)  
qg HOLOGRAM AF (p. 115)  
wh Continuous photo recording (p. 111)  
qh STBY/REC (p. 27)/Video control mode  
(p. 43)/Image size (p. 106, 107)/  
Image quality (p. 105)  
217  
In d e x  
HIGH SPEED ........................ 111  
HOLOGRAM AF .................. 115  
PROGRAM AE ....................... 59  
A, B  
AC Adaptor ............................. 16  
Adjusting the viewfinder ...... 31  
Audio dubbing ........................ 93  
AUDIO MIX ............................ 96  
AUDIO MODE ...................... 179  
Auto red eye reduction ........ 113  
AUTO SHTR .......................... 173  
A/ V connecting cable  
...................... 44, 78, 89, 94, 169  
BACK LIGHT .......................... 34  
Battery Info .............................. 18  
Battery pack ............................. 15  
BEEP ....................................... 181  
BOUNCE .................................. 52  
R
I, J, K, L  
i.LINK ..................................... 199  
i.LINK cable  
REC FOLDER ........................ 129  
Recording time ........................ 17  
Rec Review .............................. 38  
Remaining battery time  
indicator ................................ 27  
Remaining tape indicator  
........................................ 27, 179  
Remote Commander ............ 215  
Remote sensor ......................... 82  
RESET ............................. 190, 211  
Resize ...................................... 141  
.................................. 78, 89, 169  
Image protection ................... 137  
Image quality ........................ 105  
Image size ...................... 106, 107  
Index screen ........................... 131  
“InfoLITHIUM” battery pack  
........................................ 16, 197  
Infrared rays emitter ........ 34, 82  
Insert editing ........................... 91  
Intelligent accessory shoe  
........................................ 94, 213  
Interval Recording .................. 66  
Interval Photo Recording  
.............................................. 121  
JPEG ........................................ 102  
Labeling a cassette ................ 100  
LANC jack ............................. 212  
LUMI. ....................................... 56  
S
C, D  
Self-diagnosis display .......... 191  
Self-timer recording ....... 48, 124  
SHARPNESS ......................... 173  
Signal convert function ........ 169  
Skip scan .................................. 42  
Slide show .............................. 136  
SLOW SHTR ............................ 56  
SPOT FOCUS .......................... 65  
STEADYSHOT ...................... 174  
Stereo tape ............................. 195  
STILL ........................................ 56  
Sub sound .............................. 195  
Super NightShot ..................... 35  
S VIDEO jack ..................... 44, 45  
CALIBRATION ..................... 204  
Cassette Memory ............ 12, 194  
C. CHROM ............................ 118  
CHARGE (charge) lamp ........ 16  
Charging battery pack ........... 16  
Charging built-in rechargeable  
battery ................................. 204  
CLEANING CASSETTE ...... 203  
Clock set ................................... 20  
Color Slow Shutter ................. 35  
Continuous photo recording  
.............................................. 111  
Data code ................................. 40  
Date search .............................. 76  
DEMO MODE ....................... 180  
Digital effect ...................... 56, 72  
Digital program editing  
M, N  
Main sound ............................ 195  
Manual focus ........................... 63  
M. CHROM ........................... 118  
M. LUMI ................................ 118  
MEMORY MIX ...................... 118  
Memory PB ZOOM .............. 135  
Memory Photo recording .... 109  
“Memory Stick” .................... 102  
“Memory Stick” capacity ..... 108  
Menu settings ........................ 172  
Mirror mode ............................ 29  
Moisture condensation ........ 202  
MONOTONE .......................... 52  
MOSC. FADER........................ 52  
M. OVERLAP ........................ 118  
MPEG ..................................... 102  
Network function ................. 171  
NIGHTSHOT .......................... 34  
NORMAL .............................. 111  
NORM. FADER ...................... 52  
NTSC system ......................... 201  
T, U, V  
Tape counter ...................... 27, 40  
Tape PB ZOOM ....................... 73  
Telephoto ................................. 33  
Time code ................................. 27  
Title ........................................... 97  
Title search ............................... 75  
Touch panel ............................. 23  
TRAIL ....................................... 56  
Transition ........................... 26, 37  
TV color systems ............. 12, 201  
USB jack ................................. 143  
USB Streaming ...................... 156  
........................................ 80, 127  
DISPLAY .................................. 40  
DOT .......................................... 52  
Dual sound track tape .......... 195  
E
Edit search ............................... 38  
End search ............................... 37  
Expanded focus ....................... 63  
EXP BRKTG ........................... 111  
Exposure .................................. 61  
W, X, Y, Z  
F, G, H  
Warning indicators ............... 192  
Warning messages ................ 193  
White balance .......................... 49  
Wide-angle .............................. 33  
Wide mode .............................. 50  
WIPE ......................................... 52  
Write-protect tab ........... 102, 195  
Zero set memory ..................... 74  
Zoom ........................................ 33  
O, P, Q  
Flash ........................................ 113  
FLASH ...................................... 56  
Flexible Spot Meter ................. 62  
Format ............................ 103, 177  
Frame recording ...................... 67  
Full charge ............................... 16  
Grip belt ..................................... 8  
i (headphone) jack .............. 212  
Heads ...................................... 203  
HiFi SOUND ......................... 195  
OLD MOVIE ............................ 56  
OVERLAP ................................ 52  
Operation indicators ............ 217  
PB FOLDR.............................. 134  
Picture effect ...................... 55, 71  
Picture search .......................... 42  
Playing time ............................. 17  
Print mark .............................. 142  
Progressive Recording Mode ... 68  
218  
Printed on 100% recycled paper using  
VOC (Volatile Organic Compound)-free  
vegetable oil based ink.  
Printed in Japan  
3
0
8
1
4
1
4
1
1

Weil McLain ULTRA 80 User Manual
Sony WM FX665 User Manual
Sony Handycam HDR CX110 User Manual
Sony FDA ECF30 Dioptric Adjustment Lens Viewfinder Eyepiece FDAECF30 User Manual
Sony BDP S3100 User Manual
Sirius Satellite Radio SiriusConnect SBTV091807a User Manual
Sharp Cash Register XEA507 User Manual
Sharp 10 Digit Commercial Printing Calculator EL 501W User Manual
Seagate CompactFlash 1636 User Manual
SanDisk 175972 User Manual